ANRITSU CORPORATION MS2840A Signal

ANRITSU CORPORATION MS2840A Signal
MS2840A
Signal Analyzer
Operation Manual
Mainframe
Operation
Sixth Edition
For safety and warning information, please read this
manual before attempting to use the equipment.
Keep this manual with the equipment.
ANRITSU CORPORATION
Document No.: M-W3812AE-6.0
Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Corporation uses the
following safety symbols to indicate safety-related information. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of
the symbols BEFORE using the equipment. Some or all of the following symbols may be used on all Anritsu
equipment. In addition, there may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this
manual.
Symbols used in manual
DANGER
This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious injury or
death if not performed properly.
WARNING
This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if
not performed properly.
CAUTION
This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in light-to-severe
injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if proper precautions are not taken.
Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manual
The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide information
about safety items and operation precautions. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of the symbols and
take the necessary precautions BEFORE using the equipment.
This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated
symbolically in or near the barred circle.
This indicates an obligatory safety precaution. The obligatory operation is
indicated symbolically in or near the circle.
This indicates a warning or caution. The contents are indicated symbolically in or
near the triangle.
This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.
These indicate that the marked part should be recycled.
MS2840A
Signal Analyzer
Operation Manual Mainframe Operation
14
20
March
October
2016 (First Edition)
2016 (Sixth Edition)
Copyright © 2016, ANRITSU CORPORATION.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced without the prior written permission of the
publisher.
The contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice.
Printed in Japan
ii
For Safety
DANGER
Replacing Battery
● When replacing the battery, use the specified battery and insert it
with the correct polarity. If the wrong battery is used, or if the battery
is inserted with reversed polarity, there is a risk of explosion causing
severe injury or death.
Battery Disposal
● DO NOT expose batteries to heat or fire. This is dangerous and can
result in explosions or fire. Heating batteries may cause them to leak
or explode.
WARNING
● ALWAYS refer to the operation manual when working near locations
at which the alert mark shown on the left is attached. If the advice in
the operation manual is not followed there is a risk of personal injury
or reduced equipment performance. The alert mark shown on the left
may also be used with other marks and descriptions to indicate other
dangers.
● Overvoltage Category
This equipment complies with overvoltage category II defined in IEC
61010. DO NOT connect this equipment to the power supply of
overvoltage category III or IV.
Electric Shock
● To ensure that the equipment is grounded, always use the supplied
3-pin power cord, and insert the plug into an outlet with a ground
terminal. If power is supplied without grounding the equipment, there
is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal electric shock or causing
damage to the internal components.
iii
For Safety
WARNING
Repair
● Only qualified service personnel with a knowledge of electrical fire and
shock hazards should service this equipment. This equipment cannot
be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to remove the
equipment covers or unit covers or to disassemble internal
components. There are high-voltage parts in this equipment
presenting a risk of severe injury or fatal electric shock to untrained
personnel. In addition, there is a risk of damage to precision
components.
Calibration
● The performance-guarantee seal verifies the integrity of the
equipment. To ensure the continued integrity of the equipment, only
Anritsu service personnel, or service personnel of an Anritsu sales
representative, should break this seal to repair or calibrate the
equipment. Be careful not to break the seal by opening the
equipment or unit covers. If the performance-guarantee seal is
broken by you or a third party, the performance of the equipment
cannot be guaranteed.
iv
For Safety
WARNING
Falling Over
● This equipment should always be positioned in the correct manner. If
the cabinet is turned on its side, etc., it will be unstable and may be
damaged if it falls over as a result of receiving a slight mechanical
shock.
Always set up the equipment in a position where the power switch
can be reached without difficulty.
Battery Fluid
● DO NOT short the battery terminals and never attempt to disassemble
the battery or dispose of it in a fire. If the battery is damaged by any of
these actions, the battery fluid may leak. This fluid is poisonous.
DO NOT touch the battery fluid, ingest it, or get in your eyes. If it is
accidentally ingested, spit it out immediately, rinse your mouth with
water and seek medical help. If it enters your eyes accidentally, do
not rub your eyes, rinse them with clean running water and seek
medical help. If the liquid gets on your skin or clothes, wash it off
carefully and thoroughly with clean water.
LCD
● This equipment uses a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). DO NOT subject
the equipment to excessive force or drop it. If the LCD is subjected to
strong mechanical shock, it may break and liquid may leak.
This liquid is very caustic and poisonous.
DO NOT touch it, ingest it, or get in your eyes. If it is ingested
accidentally, spit it out immediately, rinse your mouth with water and
seek medical help. If it enters your eyes accidentally, do not rub your
eyes, rinse them with clean running water and seek medical help. If
the liquid gets on your skin or clothes, wash it off carefully and
thoroughly with soap and water.
v
For Safety
CAUTION
vi
Cleaning
● Always remove the main power cable from the power outlet before
cleaning dust around the power supply and fan.
• Clean the power inlet regularly. If dust accumulates around the
power pins, there is a risk of fire.
• Keep the cooling fan clean so that the ventilation holes are not
obstructed. If the ventilation is obstructed, the cabinet may
overheat and catch fire.
Check Terminal
● Never input a signal of more than the indicated value between the
measured terminal and ground. Input of an excessive signal may
damage the equipment.
For Safety
CAUTION
Replacing Memory
Back-up Battery
This equipment uses a Poly-carbomonofluoride lithium battery to backup
the memory. This battery must be replaced by service personnel when it
has reached the end of its useful life; contact the Anritsu sales section
or your nearest representative.
Note: The battery used in this equipment has a maximum useful life of
7 years. It should be replaced before this period has elapsed.
External
Storage Media
This equipment uses USB memory stick as external storage media for
storing data and programs.
If this media is mishandled or becomes faulty, important data may be
lost. It is recommended to periodically back up all important data and
programs to protect them from being lost accidentally.
Anritsu will not be held responsible for lost data.
Pay careful attention to the following points.
● Never remove the USB memory stick from the equipment while it is
being accessed.
● The USB memory stick may be damaged by static electric charges.
● Anritsu has thoroughly tested all external storage media shipped with
this equipment. Users should note that external storage media not
shipped with this equipment may not have been tested by Anritsu, thus
Anritsu cannot guarantee the performance or suitability of such media.
vii
For Safety
CAUTION
SSD
The equipment is equipped with an internal SSD from which, as with
any SSD, data may be lost under certain conditions. It is recommended
to periodically back up all important data and programs to protect them
from being lost accidentally.
Anritsu will not be held responsible for lost data.
To reduce the possibility of data loss, particular attention should be
given to the following points.
● The equipment should only be used within the recommend
temperature range, and should not be used in locations where the
temperature may fluctuate suddenly.
● Always follow the guidelines to ensure that the equipment is set up in
the specified manner.
Always
ensure that the fans at the rear and side of the equipment
●
are not blocked or obstructed in any way.
● Exercise care not to bang or shake the equipment whilst the power is on.
● Never disconnect the mains power at the plug or cut the power at the
breaker with the equipment turned on.
Use in a residential
environment
This equipment is designed for an industrial environment.
In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
Use in Corrosive
Atmospheres
Exposure to corrosive gases such as hydrogen sulfide, sulfurous acid,
and hydrogen chloride will cause faults and failures.
Note that some organic solvents release corrosive gases.
viii
Equipment Certificate
Anritsu Corporation certifies that this equipment was tested before shipment
using calibrated measuring instruments with direct traceability to public
testing organizations recognized by national research laboratories, including
the National Institute of Advanced Industrial Science and Technology, and
the National Institute of Information and Communications Technology, and
was found to meet the published specifications.
Anritsu Warranty
Anritsu Corporation will repair this equipment free-of-charge if a malfunction
occurs within one year after shipment due to a manufacturing fault.
However, software fixes will be made in accordance with the separate
Software End-User License Agreement. Moreover, Anritsu Corporation will
deem this warranty void when:
● The fault is outside the scope of the warranty conditions separately
described in the operation manual.
● The fault is due to mishandling, misuse, or unauthorized modification or
repair of the equipment by the customer.
● The fault is due to severe usage clearly exceeding normal usage.
● The fault is due to improper or insufficient maintenance by the customer.
● The fault is due to natural disaster, including fire, wind, flooding,
earthquake, lightning strike, or volcanic ash, etc.
● The fault is due to damage caused by acts of destruction, including civil
disturbance, riot, or war, etc.
● The fault is due to explosion, accident, or breakdown of any other
machinery, facility, or plant, etc.
● The fault is due to use of non-specified peripheral or applied equipment
or parts, or consumables, etc.
● The fault is due to use of a non-specified power supply or in a
non-specified installation location.
(Note)
.
● The fault is due to use in unusual environments
● The fault is due to activities or ingress of living organisms, such as
insects, spiders, fungus, pollen, or seeds.
In addition, this warranty is valid only for the original equipment purchaser. It
is not transferable if the equipment is resold.
Anritsu Corporation shall assume no liability for injury or financial loss of the
customer due to the use of or a failure to be able to use this equipment.
ix
Note:
For the purpose of this Warranty, "unusual environments" means use:
● In places of direct sunlight
● In dusty places
● Outdoors
● In liquids, such as water, oil, or organic solvents, and medical fluids, or
places where these liquids may adhere
● In salty air or in place chemically active gases (sulfur dioxide, hydrogen
sulfide, chlorine, ammonia, nitrogen oxide, or hydrogen chloride etc.) are
present
● In places where high-intensity static electric charges or electromagnetic
fields are present
● In places where abnormal power voltages (high or low) or instantaneous
power failures occur
● In places where condensation occurs
● In the presence of lubricating oil mists
● In places at an altitude of more than 2,000 m
● In the presence of frequent vibration or mechanical shock, such as in
cars, ships, or airplanes
Anritsu Corporation Contact
In the event that this equipment malfunctions, contact an Anritsu Service and
Sales office. Contact information is available in a separate file (for the PDF
version), and on the last page of this manual (for the printed version).
x
Software End-User License Agreement (EULA)
Please read this Software End-User License Agreement (hereafter this EULA) carefully before using
(includes executing, copying, registering, etc.) this software (includes programs, databases, scenarios,
etc., used to operate, set, etc., Anritsu electronic equipment). By reading this EULA and using this
software, you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of its contents and Anritsu Corporation (hereafter
Anritsu) hereby grants you the right to use this Software with the Anritsu-specified equipment
(hereafter Equipment) for the purposes set out in this EULA.
1. Grant of License and Limitations
1. Regardless of whether this Software was
purchased from or provided free-of-charge by
Anritsu, you agree not to rent, lease, lend, or
otherwise distribute this Software to third
parties and further agree not to disassemble,
recompile, reverse engineer, modify, or create
derivative works of this Software.
2. You may make one copy of this Software for
backup purposes only.
3. You are not permitted to reverse engineer
this software.
4. This EULA allows you to install one copy of
this Software on one piece of Equipment.
2. Disclaimers
To the extent not prohibited by law, in no
event shall Anritsu be liable for personal
injury, or any incidental, special, indirect or
consequential damages whatsoever,
including, without limitation, damages for
loss of profits, loss of data, business
interruption or any other commercial
damages or losses, arising out of or related
to your use or inability to use this Software.
3. Limitation of Liability
a. If a fault (bug) is discovered in this Software,
preventing operation as described in the
operation manual or specifications whether
or not the customer uses this software as
described in the manual, Anritsu shall at its
own discretion, fix the bug, or exchange the
software, or suggest a workaround,
free-of-charge. However, notwithstanding
the above, the following items shall be
excluded from repair and warranty.
i)
If this Software is deemed to be used for
purposes not described in the operation
manual or specifications.
ii) If this Software is used in conjunction with
other non-Anritsu-approved software.
iii) Recovery of lost or damaged data.
iv) If this Software or the Equipment has been
modified, repaired, or otherwise altered
without Anritsu's prior approval.
v) For any other reasons out of Anritsu's direct
control and responsibility, such as but not
limited to, natural disasters, software virus
infections, etc.
b. Expenses incurred for transport, hotel, daily
allowance, etc., for on-site repairs by Anritsu
engineers necessitated by the above faults
shall be borne by you.
c. The warranty period for faults listed in
article 3a above covered by this EULA shall
be either 6 months from the date of purchase
of this Software or 30 days after the date of
repair, whichever is longer.
xi
4. Export Restrictions
You may not use or otherwise export or
re-export directly or indirectly this Software
except as authorized by Japanese and
United States law. In particular, this
software may not be exported or re-exported
(a) into any Japanese or US embargoed
countries or (b) to anyone on the Japanese or
US Treasury Department's list of Specially
Designated Nationals or the US Department
of Commerce Denied Persons List or Entity
List. By using this Software, you warrant
that you are not located in any such country
or on any such list. You also agree that you
will not use this Software for any purposes
prohibited by Japanese and US law,
including, without limitation, the
development, design and manufacture or
production of missiles or nuclear, chemical or
biological weapons of mass destruction.
5. Termination
Anritsu shall deem this EULA terminated if
you violate any conditions described herein.
This EULA shall also be terminated if the
conditions herein cannot be continued for
any good reason, such as violation of
copyrights, patents, or other laws and
ordinances.
6. Reparations
If Anritsu suffers any loss, financial or
otherwise, due to your violation of the terms
of this EULA, Anritsu shall have the right to
seek proportional damages from you.
7. Responsibility after Termination
Upon termination of this EULA in
accordance with item 5, you shall cease all
use of this Software immediately and shall
as directed by Anritsu either destroy or
return this Software and any backup copies,
full or partial, to Anritsu.
8. Dispute Resolution
If matters of dispute or items not covered by
this EULA arise, they shall be resolved by
negotiations in good faith between you and
Anritsu.
9. Court of Jurisdiction
This EULA shall be interpreted in
accordance with Japanese law and any
disputes that cannot be resolved by
negotiation described in Article 8 shall be
settled by the Japanese courts.
xii
Using VISA Driver
for Remote Control of This Equipment
When controlling this measuring equipment remotely using the Ethernet
port, a VISA*1 driver must be installed in the PC controller. We
recommend using NI-VISA™*2 from National Instruments™ (NI hereafter)
as the VISA driver.
Although a license is generally required to use NI-VISA™, the licensed
NI-VISA™ driver is provided free-of-charge for use when performing
remote control (Note) of this measuring equipment.
The NI-VISA™ driver can be downloaded from the NI website at:
http://sine.ni.com/psp/app/doc/p/id/psp-411
Be sure to comply with the NI license agreement for the usage and
license scope.
Be sure to uninstall the NI-VISA™ driver when disposing of this
measuring equipment or transferring it to a third party, etc., when
ceasing to use NI-VISA™, or upon completion of the contract term
when using this equipment on a rental contract.
(Notes)
Although the NI-VISA™ driver itself can be downloaded
free-of-charge from the web, an implementation license is required
for legal reasons when some requirements are not met. (Check the
NI web page for the detailed requirements.)
If these requirements are not met, permission is not granted to use
NI hardware and software and an NI implementation license must be
purchased. However, since this measuring equipment incorporates
NI hardware (GPIB ASIC), the NI-VISA™ driver can be downloaded
and used free-of-charge.
Glossary of Terms:
*1:VISA: Virtual Instrument Software Architecture
I/O software specification for remote control of measuring
instruments using interfaces such as GPIB, Ethernet, USB, etc.
*2:NI-VISA™
World de facto standard I/O software interface developed by NI
and standardized by the VXI Plug&Play Alliance.
Trademarks:
- National Instruments™, NI™, NI-VISA™ and National Instruments
Corporation are all trademarks of National Instruments Corporation.
xiii
Notes On Export Management
This product and its manuals may require an Export License/Approval by
the Government of the product's country of origin for re-export from your
country.
Before re-exporting the product or manuals, please contact us to confirm
whether they are export-controlled items or not.
When you dispose of export-controlled items, the products/manuals need
to be broken/shredded so as not to be unlawfully used for military purpose.
Trademark and Registered Trademark
TM
IQproducer is a registered trademark of Anritsu Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Lifetime of Parts
The life span of certain parts used in this instrument is determined by the
operating time or the power-on time. Due consideration should be given to
the life spans of these parts when performing continuous operation over an
extended period. These parts must be replaced at the customer's expense
even if within the guaranteed period described in Warranty at the beginning
of this manual. For details on life span, refer to the corresponding section in
this manual.
Example: Display backlight, internal SSD, removable SSD,
connector for SSD, cooling fan
xiv
Cautions against computer virus infection
● Copying files and data
Only files that have been provided directly from Anritsu or generated
using Anritsu equipment should be copied to the instrument.
All other required files should be transferred by means of USB
memory stick or CompactFlash media after undergoing a thorough
virus check.
● Adding software
Do not download or install software that has not been specifically
recommended or licensed by Anritsu.
● Network connections
Ensure that the network has sufficient anti-virus security protection in
place.
xv
Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol
Equipment marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol complies with
council directive 2012/19/EU (the “WEEE Directive”) in European Union.
For Products placed on the EU market after August 13, 2005, please contact
your local Anritsu representative at the end of the product's useful life to
arrange disposal in accordance with your initial contract and the local law.
xvi
CE Conformity Marking
Anritsu affixes the CE Conformity marking on the following product(s) in
accordance with the Decision 768/2008/EC to indicate that they conform to
the EMC and LVD directive of the European Union (EU).
CE marking
1. Product Model
Model:
MS2840A Signal Analyzer
2. Applied Directive
EMC:
LVD:
Directive 2014/30/EU
Directive 2014/35/EU
3. Applied Standards
● EMC: Emission: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Class A)
Immunity: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Table 2)
IEC 61000-4-2 (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-3 (EMF)
IEC 61000-4-4 (Burst)
IEC 61000-4-5 (Surge)
IEC 61000-4-6 (CRF)
IEC 61000-4-8 (RPFMF)
IEC 61000-4-11 (V dip/short)
Performance Criteria*
B
A
B
B
A
A
B, C
*: Performance Criteria
A: The equipment shall continue to operate as intended
during and after the test. No degradation of
performance or loss of function is allowed below a
performance level specified by the manufacturer, when
the equipment is used as intended. The performance
level may be replaced by a permissible loss of
performance. If the minimum performance level or the
permissible performance loss is not specified by the
manufacturer, either of these may be derived from the
product description and documentation and what the
user may reasonably expect from the equipment if used
as intended.
xvii
B: The equipment shall continue to operate as intended
after the test. No degradation of performance or loss of
function is allowed below a performance level specified
by the manufacturer, when the equipment is used as
intended. The performance level may be replaced by a
permissible loss of performance. During the test,
degradation of performance is however allowed. No
change of actual operating state or stored data is
allowed. If the minimum performance level or the
permissible performance loss is not specified by the
manufacturer, either of these may be derived from the
product description and documentation and what the
user may reasonably expect from the equipment if used
as intended.
C: Temporary loss of function is allowed, provided the
function is self-recoverable or can be restored by the
operation of the controls.
Harmonic current emissions:
EN 61000-3-2: 2006 +A1:2009 A2:2009
(Class A equipment)
LVD:
EN
61010-1: 2010 (Pollution Degree 2)
●
4. Authorized representative
Name:
Address, city:
Country:
xviii
Murray Coleman
Head of Customer Service EMEA
ANRITSU EMEA Ltd.
200 Capability Green, Luton
Bedfordshire, LU1 3LU
United Kingdom
RCM Conformity Marking
Anritsu affixes the RCM mark on the following product(s) in accordance with
the regulation to indicate that they conform to the EMC framework of
Australia/New Zealand.
RCM marking
1. Product Model
Model:
MS2840A Signal Analyzer
2. Applied Standards
EMC:Emission: EN 61326-1: 2013 (Class A equipment)
xix
About Eco label
The label shown on the left is attached to Anritsu products meeting our
environmental standards.
Details about this label and the environmental standards are available on the
Anritsu website at http://www.anritsu.com/
xx
About This Manual
 Associated Documents
The operation manual configuration of the MS2840A Signal Analyzer is
shown below.
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A Signal Analyzer Operation Manual
(Main Frame Operation)
Or
MS2830A Signal Analyzer Operation Manual
(Main Frame Operation)
MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation Manual
(Main Frame Operation)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A
Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Main Frame Remote Control)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A
Signal Analyzer Operation Manual
(Signal Analyzer Function
Operation)
Or
MS2830A/MS2840A
Signal Analyzer Operation Manual
(Signal Analyzer Function
Operation)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A
Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Signal Analyzer Function Remote Control)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A
Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual
(Spectrum Analyzer Function
Operation)
Or
MS2830A/MS2840A
Spectrum Analyzer Operation Manual
(Spectrum Analyzer Function
Operation)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A
Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Spectrum Analyzer Function Remote Control)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A
Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Phase Noise Measurement Function Operation)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A
Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Phase Noise Measurement Function Remote Control)
I
 Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Mainframe) <This document>
 Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Mainframe Remote Control)
Description of basic operations, maintenance procedures, common
functions and common remote functions of the mainframe
 Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Signal Analyzer Function)
 Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Signal Analyzer Function Remote
Control)
Description of basic operations, functions and remote functions of the
signal analyzer
 Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Spectrum Analyzer Function)
 Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Spectrum Analyzer Function Remote
Control)
Description of basic operations, functions and remote functions of the
spectrum analyzer
 Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Phase Noise Measurement Function)
 Signal Analyzer Operation Manual (Phase Noise Measurement Function
Remote Control)
Description of basic operations, common functions and common
remote functions of the Phase Noise Measurement function
In this document,
II
indicates a panel key.
Table of Contents
1
For Safety ....................................................
iii
About This Manual........................................
I
Chapter 1 Overview ....................................
1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
3
Product Overview ...................................................... 1-3
Product Configuration ................................................ 1-4
Specifications ............................................................. 1-11
4
Chapter 2 Before Use .................................
2.1
2.2
2.3
Installation Location ................................................... 2-2
Items to Check Before Use ........................................ 2-4
Power Connection ..................................................... 2-9
Chapter 3 Common Operations ................
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Part Names ................................................................
Turning Power On/Off ................................................
Auto Calibration .........................................................
Settings on Configuration Screen ..............................
Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications .......
Save and Recall Functions ........................................
Initializing ...................................................................
Installing and Uninstalling ..........................................
Chapter 4 Tutorial ......................................
6
3-1
3-2
3-12
3-14
3-20
3-37
3-46
3-55
3-57
7
8
9
4-1
Spectrum Analysis Using Signal Analyzer ................. 4-2
Spectrum Analysis Using Spectrum Analyzer ........... 4-6
Chapter 5 System .......................................
5-1
Index
5.1
5.2
5.3
5
Appendix
4.1
4.2
2-1
Setting Windows ........................................................ 5-2
Storage Device Configuration .................................... 5-8
System Recovery Functions ...................................... 5-9
III
Chapter 6 Performance Test .....................
6.1
6.2
Overview of Performance Test .................................. 6-2
Performance Test Items ............................................ 6-5
Chapter 7 Power Meter ..............................
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Power Meter...............................................................
Display Description ....................................................
Function Menu ...........................................................
Initialization ................................................................
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function ....
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
Outline of BER Measurement ....................................
Display Description ....................................................
BER Measurement Function Menu............................
Connecting MS2830A-026/126 to External System ..
Performing BER Measurement ..................................
Setting Automatic Resynchronization Function .........
Setting Input Interface ................................................
Setting PN_Fix Pattern ..............................................
Setting User-defined Pattern .....................................
Description of BER Measurement Operation ............
Chapter 9 Maintenance ..............................
9.1
9.2
9.3
IV
6-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-5
7-15
8-1
8-2
8-5
8-9
8-11
8-12
8-22
8-27
8-28
8-34
8-42
9-1
Daily Maintenance and Storage................................. 9-2
Repackaging and transporting when returning
product ....................................................................... 9-4
Calibration .................................................................. 9-5
Appendix A Performance Test Result
Form ........................................
A-1
1
Appendix B Panel Keys and Keyboard
Operations...............................
B-1
2
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure ..........
C-1
Appendix D
D-1
Error Messages .....................
3
4
Appendix E
Initial Value List .....................
E-1
5
Index .......................................................... Index-1
6
7
8
9
Appendix
Index
V
VI.
Chapter 1 Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the MS2840A Signal Analyzer and
product configuration.
1.3
Overview
1.1
1.2
1
Product Overview ......................................................... 1-3
Product Configuration ................................................... 1-4
1.2.1 Standard configuration ..................................... 1-4
1.2.2 Options ............................................................. 1-5
1.2.3 Applicable Parts................................................ 1-8
1.2.4 Application Software ....................................... 1-10
Specifications .............................................................. 1-11
1.3.1 Mainframe (MS2840A) ................................... 1-11
1.3.2 Rubidium Reference Oscillator Option
(MS2840A-001/101) ....................................... 1-57
1.3.3 High Stability Reference Oscillator Option
(MS2840A-002/102) ....................................... 1-57
1.3.4 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 31.25 MHz
Option (MS2840A-005/105) ........................... 1-57
1.3.5 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 10 MHz
Option (MS2840A-006/106) ........................... 1-57
1.3.6 Preamplifier Option (MS2840A-008/108) ....... 1-58
1.3.7 Bandwidth Extension to 31.25 MHz for
Millimeter-wave Option (MS2840A-009/109) . 1-58
1.3.8 Phase Noise Measurement Function Option
(MS2840A-010/110) ....................................... 1-59
1.3.9 Secondary SSD Option (MS2840A-011/111) . 1-59
1.3.10 Precompliance EMI Function Option
(MS2840A-016/116) ....................................... 1-59
1.3.11 Noise Figure Measurement Function Option
(MS2840A-017/117) ....................................... 1-60
1.3.12 BER Measurement Function Option
(MS2840A-026/126) ....................................... 1-61
1.3.13 Analog Function Extension for Vector Signal
Generator Option (MS2840A-029/129) .......... 1-62
1.3.14 Low Phase Noise Performance Option
(MS2840A-066/166) ....................................... 1-62
1.3.15 Microwave Preselector Bypass Option
(MS2840A-067/167) ....................................... 1-65
1.3.16 Microwave Preamplifier Option
(MS2840A-068/168) ....................................... 1-68
1.3.17 26.5GHz Microwave Preamplifier Option
(MS2840A-069/169) ....................................... 1-69
1-1
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.18 Analysis Bandwidth Extension
to 62.5 MHz/125 MHz Option
(MS2840A-077/177/078/178) ......................... 1-70
1.3.19 3.6GHz Analog Signal Generator Option
(MS2840A-088/188) ....................................... 1-73
1.3.20 Vector Function Extension for Analog
Signal Generator Option (MS2840A-189) ...... 1-74
1.3.21 2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option
(MS2840A-019/119) ........................................ 1-74
1.3.22 Noise Floor Reduction Option
(MS2840A-051/151) ........................................ 1-80
1-2
1.1
Product Overview
1.1 Product Overview
The MS2840A enables high-speed and high-accuracy signal processing of
wide-ranging analyses at full-span, a characteristic of conventional
sweep-type spectrum analyzers, using a digital IF block. In addition, the
FFT process (high-speed Fourier conversion) realizes high-speed
spectrum analysis and simultaneous analysis on frequency and time axes
not possible with conventional sweep-type spectrum analyzers. Also,
added option enables recording of the RF input signal as digital data
(digitize function). It can be used in a variety of applications from
research and development to manufacturing thanks to its characteristics.
The key features are listed below:
 Wide frequency band (3.6 GHz/6 GHz/26.5 GHz/44.5 GHz)
 Wide analysis bandwidth (Option 006/106: 10 MHz,
Option 005/105/009/109: 31.25 MHz,
Option 077/177: 62.5 MHz,
Option 078/178: 125 MHz)
 High dynamic range
 High-speed measurement
 High-speed, high-accuracy signal analysis using digital IF
 Enables time-continuous analysis of loaded data
 Large-capacity waveform memory and digitization function that
records RF signals without missing
(when option 006/106/005/105/009/109/077/177/078/178 is used)
 BER Measurement function (when option 026/126 is used)
 Rich measurement functions
The MS2840A is equipped with the hardware product made by National
Instruments and comes with the license for NI-VISA. NI-VISA can be
used for the purpose of controlling the MS2840A.
1-3
1
Overview
The MS2840A Signal Analyzer (“the MS2840A” hereafter) is a spectrum
analyzer to which options such as real-time signal analysis and vector
modulation analysis can be added.
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 Product Configuration
1.2.1
Standard configuration
Table 1.2.1-1 lists the standard configuration. At unpacking, check that
all items are included. Contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office if any
parts are missing or damaged.
Table 1.2.1-1 Standard Configuration
Items
Model
Unit
MS2840A
Access J0017F
ories
P0031A
Z0541A
—
1-4
Product name
Qua
ntity
Signal Analyzer
Power cord
USB memory
USB Mouse
1
1
1
1
Installation DVD-R
1
Remarks
—
1 GB or more
—
Application software,
Operation Manual DVD-R
1.2
1.2.2
Product Configuration
Options
Tables 1.2.2-1 through 1.2.2-2 list the options. They are sold separately.
1
Note:
Table 1.2.2-1 Additional Options at/after shipment
Option Number
MS2840A-040
MS2840A-041
MS2840A-044
MS2840A-046
MS2840A-001
MS2840A-101
MS2840A-002
MS2840A-102
MS2840A-005
MS2840A-105
MS2840A-006
MS2840A-106
MS2840A-008
MS2840A-108
MS2840A-009
MS2840A-109
Product Name
Remarks
3.6 GHz Signal Analyzer
6 GHz Signal Analyzer
26.5 GHz Signal Analyzer
44.5 GHz Signal Analyzer
Rubidium Reference Oscillator
9 kHz to 3.6 GHz
9 kHz to 6 GHz
9 kHz to 26.5 GHz
9 kHz to 44.5 GHz
See Table 1.3.1-1 “Internal reference
oscillator”.
Rubidium Reference Oscillator Retrofit See Table 1.3.1-1 “Internal reference
oscillator”.
High Stability Reference Oscillator
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Internal reference
oscillator”
High Stability Reference Oscillator,
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Internal reference
Retrofit
oscillator”
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to
Extends Analysis Bandwidth to
31.25 MHz
31.25 MHz
Not available when MS2840A-046 is
installed.
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to
Extends Analysis Bandwidth to
31.25 MHz, Retrofit
31.25 MHz
Not available when MS2840A-046 is
installed.
Analysis Bandwidth 10 MHz
Analysis bandwidth: Max. 10 MHz
Analysis Bandwidth 10 MHz, Retrofit
Analysis bandwidth: Max. 10 MHz
Preamplifier
100 kHz to 3.6 GHz (With
MS2840A-040)
100 kHz to 6 GHz (With
MS2840A-041/044/046)
Preamplifier, Retrofit
100 kHz to 3.6 GHz (With
MS2840A-040)
100 kHz to 6 GHz (With
MS2840A-041/044/046)
Bandwidth Extension to 31.25 MHz for Extends Analysis Bandwidth to
Millimeter-wave
31.25 MHz
Available only when MS2840A-046 is
installed.
Bandwidth Extension to 31.25 MHz for Extends Analysis Bandwidth to
Millimeter-wave, Retrofit
31.25 MHz
Available only when MS2840A-046 is
installed.
1-5
Overview
There is a risk of losing the data when adding additional option(s),
so back up the data stored on the SSD, in advance. Anritsu is not
responsible for any loss of data.
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.2.2-1 Additional Options at/after shipment (Cont’d)
Option Number
MS2840A-010
MS2840A-110
MS2840A-011
MS2840A-111
MS2840A-016
MS2840A-116
MS2840A-017
MS2840A-117
MS2840A-019
MS2840A-119
MS2840A-020
MS2840A-120
Product Name
Phase Noise Measurement Function
Phase Noise Measurement Function,
Retrofit
Secondary SSD
Secondary SSD, Retrofit
Precompliance EMI Function
Precompliance EMI Function Retrofit
Noise Figure Measurement Function
Noise Figure Measurement Function
Retrofit
2dB Step Attenuator for
Millimeter-wave
2dB Step Attenuator for
Millimeter-wave Retrofit
3.6 GHz Vector Signal Generator
3.6 GHz Vector Signal Generator,
Remarks
10 MHz to Upper frequency limit
10 MHz to Upper frequency limit
250 kHz to 3.6 GHz
250 kHz to 3.6 GHz
Retrofit
MS2840A-021
MS2840A-121
MS2840A-022
MS2840A-122
MS2840A-026
MS2840A-126
MS2840A-027
MS2840A-127
MS2840A-028
MS2840A-128
MS2840A-029
MS2840A-129
MS2840A-051
MS2840A-151
MS2840A-066
MS2840A-166
1-6
6 GHz Vector Signal Generator
6 GHz Vector Signal Generator,
Retrofit
Low Power Extension for Vector Signal
Generator
Low Power Extension for Vector Signal
Generator, Retrofit
BER Measurement function
BER Measurement function, Retrofit
ARB Memory Upgrade 256 MSample
for Vector Signal Generator
ARB Memory Upgrade 256 MSample
for Vector Signal Generator, Retrofit
AWGN
AWGN, Retrofit
Analog Function Extension for Vector
Signal Generator
Analog Function Extension for Vector
Signal Generator Retrofit
Noise Floor Reduction
Noise Floor Reduction Retrofit
Low Phase Noise Performance
Low Phase Noise Performance,
Retrofit
250 kHz to 6 GHz
250 kHz to 6 GHz
Lower setting limit of output signal
level: –136 dBm
Lower setting limit of output signal
level: –136 dBm
1.2
Product Configuration
Table 1.2.2-1 Additional Options at/after shipment (Cont’d)
Option Number
MS2840A-068
Microwave Preselector Bypass
Microwave Preselector Bypass,
Retrofit
Microwave Preamplifier
MS2840A-168
Microwave Preamplifier, Retrofit
MS2840A-069
26.5GHz Microwave Preamplifier
MS2840A-169
26.5GHz Microwave Preamplifier,
Retrofit
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to
62.5 MHz
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to
62.5 MHz, Retrofit
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to
125 MHz
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to
125 MHz, Retrofit
3.6GHz Analog Signal Generator
3.6GHz Analog Signal Generator
Retrofit
Vector Function Extension for Analog
Signal Generator Retrofit
MS2840A-077
MS2840A-177
MS2840A-078
MS2840A-178
MS2840A-088
MS2840A-188
MS2840A-189
1
Remarks
With MS2840A-044/046 installed
With MS2840A-044/046 installed
Overview
MS2840A-067
MS2840A-167
Product Name
100 kHz to 44.5 GHz
(With MS2840-046 installed)
100 kHz to 44.5 GHz
(With MS2840-046 installed)
100 kHz to 26.5 GHz
(With MS2840A-044 installed)
100 kHz to 26.5 GHz
(With MS2840A-044 installed)
Extends Analysis Bandwidth to
62.5 MHz
Extends Analysis Bandwidth to
62.5 MHz
Extends Analysis Bandwidth to
125 MHz
Extends Analysis Bandwidth to
125 MHz
Table 1.2.2-2 Optional Warranty Extension (MS2840A)
Option Number
Product Name
MS2840A-ES210 2-year Warranty Service
MS2840A-ES310 3-year Warranty Service
MS2840A-ES510 5-year Warranty Service
Remarks
–
–
–
1-7
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2.3
Applicable Parts
Table 1.2.3-1 lists the application parts. They are sold separately.
Table 1.2.3-1 Applicable Parts
Model
Number
W3812AE
W2851AE
W3335AE
W2853AE
W3336AE
W2855AE
W3117AE
W3118AE
W3337AE
W3338AE
W2914AE
W2929AE
1-8
Product Name
MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation Manual
(Mainframe Operation)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation
Manual (Mainframe Remote Control)
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation
Manual (Signal Analyzer Function Operation)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation
Manual (Signal Analyzer Function Remote Control)
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation
Manual (Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation
Manual (Spectrum Analyzer Function Remote
Control)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation
Manual (Phase Noise Measurement Function
Operation)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation
Manual (Phase Noise Measurement Function
Remote Control)
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Vector Signal
Generator Operation Manual (Operation)
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Vector Signal
Generator Operation Manual (Remote Control)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Vector Signal
Generator Operation Manual (IQproducer™)
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and
MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Vector Signal
Generator Operation Manual (Standard Waveform
Pattern)
Remarks
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
Printed version
1.2
Product Configuration
Table 1.2.3-1 Applicable Parts (Cont’d)
Model Number
Product Name
Power divider (K connector)
MA1612A
MP752A
FOUR-PORT Junction PAD
TERMINATION
MA24106A
USB Power Sensor
J0576B
Coaxial Cord
J0576D
Coaxial Cord
J0127A
Coaxial Cord
J0127B
Coaxial Cord
J0127C
Coaxial Cord
J0322A
Coaxial Cord
J0322B
Coaxial Cord
J0322C
Coaxial Cord
J0322D
Coaxial Cord
J1398A
N-SMA ADAPTOR
J0911
Coaxial cord, 1.0 M (for 40 GHz)
J0912
Coaxial cord, 0.5 M (for 40 GHz)
41KC-3
Fixed attenuator, 3 dB
DC to 26.5 GHz, 50  K-J,
1Wmax
5 MHz to 3 GHz, N-J
DC to 12.4 GHz, 50  N-P
50 MHz to 6 GHz,
with USB/Mini B cable
(Refer to Appendix D)
Approx. 1 m length
(N-P, 5D-2W, N-P)
Approx. 2 m length
(N-P, 5D-2W, N-P)
Approx. 1 m length (BNC-P,
RG58A/U, BNC-P)
Approx. 2 m length (BNC-P,
RG58A/U, BNC-P)
Approx. 0.5 m length (BNC-P,
RG58A/U, BNC-P)
DC to 18 GHz, approx. 0.5 m
length (SMA-P, 50 
SUCOFLEX104, SMA-P)
DC to 18 GHz, approx. 1 m
length (SMA-P, 50 
SUCOFLEX104, SMA-P)
DC to 18 GHz, approx. 1.5 m
length (SMA-P, 50 
SUCOFLEX104, SMA-P)
DC to 18 GHz, approx. 2 m
length (SMA-P, 50 
SUCOFLEX104, SMA-P)
DC to 26.5 GHz, 50  N-P,
SMA-J
DC to 40 GHz, approx. 1 m
length
(SF102A,
11K254/11K254/1.0M)
DC to 40 GHz, approx. 0.5 m
length
(SF102A,
11K254/11K254/0.5M)
DC to 40 GHz, 3 dB
1-9
1
Overview
K240B
Remarks
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.2.3-1 Applicable Parts (Cont’d)
Model
Number
Product Name
J1261A
J1261B
J1261C
J1261D
J0008
Ethernet cable (shield type)
Ethernet cable (shield type)
Ethernet cable (shield type)
Ethernet cable (shield type)
GPIB cable, 2.0 m
J1487A
AUX conversion adapter
J1556A
AUX conversion adapter
B0635A
B0636A
Z0975A
34AKNF50
Rack Mount Kit
Carrying case
Keyboard (USB)
Ruggedized K-To-Type N Female Adapter
1.2.4
Remarks
Straight cable, 1 m
Straight cable, 3 m
Crossover cable, 1 m
Crossover cable, 3 m
Approx. 2 m length
AUX  BNC
For vector signal generator
option
AUX  BNC
For vector signal generator
option and BER measurement
function option
Protective cover, casters
DC to 20 GHz, SWR: 1.25
Application Software
For the latest information on the application software, either visit the
MS2840A page on Anritsu website or contact an Anritsu Service and
Sales office.
Application software is sold separately.
Anritsu website: http://www.anritsu.com/
1-10
1.3
Specifications
1.3 Specifications
1.3.1
1
Mainframe (MS2840A)
Tables 1.3.1-1 through 1.3.1-3 show the specifications.
Typical values are only for reference and are not guaranteed.
Nominal values are not guaranteed.
The following conditions should apply (unless otherwise noted):
Auto Sweep Time Select:
Auto Swp Type Rules:
Switching Speed mode:
Attenuator Mode:
Normal
Swept Only
Normal (Best Phase Noise)
Mechanical Atten Only
1-11
Overview
The following specification values are those under the conditions after
30-min warm-up at stable ambient temperature.
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe
Item
Frequency
Frequency range
Frequency band
configuration
Preselector range
Specification
9 kHz to 3.6 GHz
(MS2840A-040)
9 kHz to 6 GHz
(MS2840A-041)
9 kHz to 26.5 GHz
(MS2840A-044)
9 kHz to 44.5 GHz
(MS2840A-046)
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Band
Mixer harmonic order [N]
9 kHz to 4000 MHz
0
1
3500 MHz to 4400 MHz
1
1/2
4300 MHz to 6100 MHz
1
1
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Band
Mixer harmonic order [N]
9 kHz to 4000 MHz
0
1
3500 MHz to 4400 MHz
1
1/2
4300 MHz to 6000 MHz
1
1
3900 MHz to 8000 MHz
3
1
7900 MHz to 10575 MHz
4
1
10475 MHz to 12200 MHz
5
2
12100 MHz to 18400 MHz
6
2
18300 MHz to 26600 MHz
7
4
26500 MHz to 42100 MHz
8
4
42000 MHz to 44500 MHz
9
8
Frequency Band Mode: Normal
4 GHz to 6 GHz
(MS2840A-041)
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious
3.5 GHz to 6 GHz
(MS2840A-041)
Frequency Band Mode: Normal
4 GHz to 26.5 GHz
(MS2840A-044)
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious
3.5 GHz to 26.5 GHz
(MS2840A-044)
Frequency Band Mode: Normal
4 GHz to 44.5 GHz
(MS2840A-046)
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious
3.5 GHz to 44.5 GHz
(MS2840A-046)
Frequency settings
Settable range –100 MHz to 3.7 GHz
–100 MHz to 6.1 GHz
–100 MHz to 27.0 GHz
–100 MHz to 45 GHz
Resolution 1 Hz
1-12
(MS2840A-040)
(MS2840A-041)
(MS2840A-044)
(MS2840A-046)
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Internal reference oscillator
Frequency accuracy at the
initial calibration
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-001/101/002/102 installed,
1  10–6/year
2.5  10–6 (0 to 50C)
Overview
Aging rate
Temperature
characteristics
1
Specification
±1×10–6 (18 to 28°C, 1 hour after power application)
With MS2840A-002/102 installed,
Activation characteristics
Aging rate
Temperature
characteristics
Frequency accuracy at the
initial calibration
Based on frequency 24 hours after power application, at 23°C
5  10–7 (2 minutes after power application)
5  10–8 (5 minutes after power application)
1  10–7/year
2  10–8 (0 to 50C)
±2.2×10–8 (18 to 28°C, 1 hour after power application)
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Based on frequency 24 hours after power application, at 23°C
5  10–7 (2 minutes after power application)
5  10–8 (5 minutes after power application)
Aging rate
1  10–7/year
Temperature
2  10–8 (0 to 50C)
characteristics
Frequency accuracy at the
±2.2×10–8 (18 to 28°C, 1 hour after power application)
initial calibration
With MS2840A-040/041/044/046 installed,
With MS2840A-001/101 installed,
Activation characteristics
Based on frequency 24 hours after power application, at 23C
±1×10–9 (7 minutes after power application)
Aging rate
±1×10–10/month
Temperature
±1×10–9 (0 to 50°C)
characteristics
Frequency accuracy at the
±1.0×10–10 (18 to 28°C, 1 hour after power application)
initial calibration
Activation characteristics
1-13
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Single side band noise
Spurious caused by the
local frequency
Specification
At 18 to 28°C, 1000 MHz, spectrum analyzer function
Switching Speed mode: Normal (Best Phase Noise)
(Frequency offset)
(Single side band noise)
10 Hz
–80 dBc/Hz
Nominal*
100 Hz
–92 dBc/Hz
Nominal*
1 kHz
–117 dBc/Hz
Nominal*
–123 dBc/Hz
10 kHz
–123 dBc/Hz
100 kHz
–135 dBc/Hz
1 MHz
–148 dBc/Hz
Nominal
10 MHz
*:
With MS2840A-001/101 installed and 002/102 not installed.
With MS2840A-066/166 installed and operating (066/166: Enabled,
Center frequency: 500 MHz, and SPAN ≤ 1 MHz as spectrum analyzer)
at the temperature of 18 to 28°C.
(Frequency Offset)
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
100 kHz
1 MHz
10 MHz < frequency ≤ 1 GHz
3 kHz ≤ Freq. offset < 100 kHz
100 kHz ≤ Freq. offset < 10 MHz
Frequency > 1 GHz
(Frequency offset)
3 kHz ≤ Freq. offset < 100 kHz
100 kHz ≤ Freq. offset < 10 MHz
(Single side band noise)
–98 dBc/Hz
Nominal
–122 dBc/Hz
–133 dBc/Hz
–133 dBc/Hz
–148 dBc/Hz
Nominal
–70 [dBc] Nominal
–75 [dBc] Nominal
Spurious
–70 + 20×log(f) [dBc] Nominal*2
–75 + 20×log(N) [dBc] Nominal*2
*2: f: Receiving frequency [GHz], N: Mixing order
1-14
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Maximum input level
Continuous wave
average power
DC
Continuous wave
average power
DC
1
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier
turned off
Average noise level up to +30 dBm
With MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and Preamplifier turned on
Average noise level up to +10 dBm
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off:
+30 dBm (Input attenuator ≥ 10 dB)
+20 dBm (Input attenuator = 0 dB)
±10 Vdc
With MS2840A-008/108 and Preamplifier turned on:
+10 dBm (Input attenuator = 0 dB)
±10 Vdc
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Continuous wave
average power
DC
Continuous wave
average power
DC
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier
turned off:
+30 dBm (Input attenuator ≥ 10 dB)
+20 dBm (Input attenuator = 0 dB)
±0 Vdc
With MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and Preamplifier turned on:
+10 dBm (Input attenuator = 0 dB)
±0 Vdc
Input attenuator
With MS2840A-040/041/044 installed,
0 to 60 dB, 2 dB steps
With MS2840A-046 installed,
Attenuator Mode: E-ATT Combined Mode, Frequency Band Mode:
Normal, and Stop frequency ≤ 6 GHz.
or Attenuator Mode: E-ATT Combined Mode, Frequency Band Mode:
Spurious, and Stop frequency ≤ 4 GHz.
or MS2840A-019/119 installed
0 to 60 dB, 2 dB steps
Attenuator Mode: M-ATT Only.
or Attenuator Mode: E-ATT Combined Mode, Frequency Band Mode:
Normal, and Stop frequency > 6 GHz.
or Attenuator Mode: E-ATT Combined Mode, Frequency Band Mode:
Spurious, and Stop frequency > 4 GHz.
0 to 60 dB, 10 dB steps
1-15
Overview
Amplitude
Measurement range
Specification
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Input attenuator switching
error
Reference level
Setting range
Unit
1-16
Specification
Based on input attenuator 10 dB, at 18 to 28C
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier
turned off:
±0.20 dB (10 to 60 dB)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±0.75 dB (10 to 60 dB)
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±0.80 dB (10 to 60 dB)
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±1.0 dB (10 to 60 dB)
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±1.0 dB typ.(10 to 60 dB)
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
Log scale: –120 to +50 dBm or equivalent value
Linear scale: 22.4 V to 70.7 V or equivalent value
Resolution: 0.01 dB or equivalent level
Log scale: dBm, dBV, dBmV, dBV (emf), dBV/m, V, W
Linear scale: V
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Linearity error
1
Specification
Overview
Without MS2840A-051/151 or with Noise Floor Reduction turned off.
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier
turned off:
Excluding the noise floor effect
±0.07 dB (mixer input level  –20 dBm)
±0.10 dB (mixer input level  –10 dBm)
With MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier
turned on:
Excluding the noise floor effect
±0.07 dB (Preamplifier Input Level ≤–40 dBm)
±0.10 dB (Preamplifier Input Level ≤–30 dBm)
When Attenuator Mode is E-ATT Combined:
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier
turned off:
Excluding the noise floor effect
±0.07 dB (mixer input level ≤ –20 dBm, RF Input Level ≤–10 dBm)
±0.10 dB (mixer input level ≤ –10 dBm, RF Input Level ≤–10 dBm)
±0.07 dB Nominal
(mixer input level ≤ –20 dBm, 9 kHz ≤ frequency ≤ 300 MHz,
RF input level ≤+5 dBm)
(mixer input level ≤ –20 dBm, 300 MHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz,
RF input level ≤ +20 dBm)
±0.10 dB Nominal
(mixer input level ≤ –10 dBm, 9 kHz ≤ frequency ≤ 300 MHz,
RF input level ≤+5 dBm)
(mixer input level ≤ –10 dBm, 300 MHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz,
RF input level ≤ +20 dBm)
1-17
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
RF frequency
characteristics
1-18
Specification
At 18 to 28°C, input attenuator = 10 dB,
With MS2840A-040/041,
and without MS2840A-008/108, or with Preamplifier turned off,
and without MS2840A-066/166, or with MS2840A-066/166 turned off:
±1.0 dB
(9 kHz ≤ frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.35 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 50 MHz)
±0.35 dB
(50 MHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(50 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.50 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-040/041,
and MS2840A-008/108, or with Preamplifier turned off,
and without MS2840A-066/166, or with MS2840A-066/166 turned on:
±1.0 dB
(9 kHz ≤ frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.35 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 50 MHz)
±0.35 dB
(50 MHz ≤ frequency < 3 GHz)
±1.50 dB
(3 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz)
With MS2840A-040/041,
and with MS2840A-008/108, and with Preamplifier turned on,
and without MS2840A-066/166, or with MS2840A-066/166 turned off:
±1.0 dB
(100 kHz ≤ frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.65 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-040/041,
and with MS2840A-008/108, and with Preamplifier turned on,
and without MS2840A-066/166, or with MS2840A-066/166 turned on:
±1.0 dB
(100 kHz ≤ frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.65 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3 GHz)
±1.8 dB
(3 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz)
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
RF frequency
characteristics (Cont’d)
Specification
1-19
1
Overview
With MS2840A-044/046,
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169, or with Preamplifier
turned off,
Without MS2840A-067/167 or with Microwave Preselector Bypass
turned off and after Preselector Auto Tune is done:
±1.0 dB
(9 kHz ≤ frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.35 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 50 MHz)
±0.35 dB
(50 MHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(50 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.50 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.50 dB
(6 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±2.50 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±2.50 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±2.50 dB typ.
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
RF frequency
characteristics (Cont’d)
Specification
With MS2840A-044/046,
and with MS2840A-008/108, and with Preamplifier turned on:
±1.0 dB
(100 kHz ≤ frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.65 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-044/046,
and with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, with Preamplifier turned on,
Without MS2840A-067/167 or with Microwave Preselector Bypass
turned off and after Preselector Auto Tune is done:
±1.0 dB
(100 kHz ≤ frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.65 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode:
Spurious)
±2.50 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±3.50 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±3.50 dB Nominal
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
1-20
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
1 dB gain compression
Specification
1-21
1
Overview
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off:
At mixer input level
≥+3 dBm
(300 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≥+3 dBm
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-008/108 and Preamplifier turned on:
At Preamplifier input level
≥–15 dBm Nominal
(300 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier
turned off:
At mixer input level
≥+3 dBm
(300 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≥+3 dBm
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≥0 dBm
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≥–1 dBm
(13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≥–1 dBm
Nominal
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and Preamplifier turned on:
At Preamplifier input level
≥–15 dBm Nominal
(300 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
≥–21 dBm Nominal
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≥–21 dBm Nominal
(13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≥–21 dBm Nominal
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Spurious response
Secondary harmonic wave
distortion
1-22
Specification
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off:
At mixer input level = –30 dBm
Harmonics [dBc]
SHI [dBm]
≤–60
≥+30
(10 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 300 MHz)
≤–65
≥+35
(300 MHz < Input frequency ≤ 1 GHz)
≤–65
≥+35
(1 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz)
At mixer input level = –20 dBm
Harmonics [dBc] SHI [dBm]
≤–80
≥+60
(2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
≤–80
≥+60
(1.75 GHz ≤ Input frequency≤ 3 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on:
At preamplifier input level = –45 dBm
Harmonics [dBc] SHI[dBm]
≤–50 Nominal
≥+5 Nominal
(10 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 300 MHz)
≤–55 Nominal
≥+10 Nominal
(300 MHz < frequency ≤ 3 GHz)
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and MS2840A-067/167:
At mixer input level = –30 dBm
Harmonics [dBc]
SHI[dBm]
≤–60
≥+30
(10 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 300 MHz)
≤–65
≥+35
(300 MHz < Input frequency ≤ 1 GHz)
≤–65
≥+35
(1 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
≤–65
≥+35
(1 GHz < Input frequency < 1.75 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
At mixer input level = –20 dBm
Harmonics [dBc] SHI [dBm]
≤–80
≥+60
(2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
≤–80
≥+60
(1.75 GHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
At mixer input level = –10 dBm
≤–80
≥+70
(2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≤–90
≥+80
(3 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 13.25 GHz)
≤–90
≥+80 Nominal
(13.25 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 22.25 GHz)
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
With MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier
turned off:
Or with MS2840A-067/167 and with Microwave Preselector Bypass
turned off:
At mixer input level = –30 dBm
Harmonics [dBc] SHI [dBm]
≤–60
≥+30
(10 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 300 MHz)
≤–65
≥+35
(300 MHz < frequency ≤ 1 GHz)
≤–65
≥+35
(1 GHz < frequency ≤ 2 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
≤–65
≥+35
(1 GHz < frequency < 1.75 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
At mixer input level = –20 dBm
Harmonics [dBc] SHI [dBm]
≤–80
≥+60
(2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
≤–80
≥+60
(1.75 GHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
At mixer input level = –10 dBm
≤–70
≥+60
(2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≤–70
≥+60
(3 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 13.25 GHz)
≤–70 Nominal
≥+60 Nominal
(13.25 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 22.25 GHz)
1-23
1
Overview
Secondary harmonic wave
distortion (Cont’d)
Specification
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Secondary harmonic wave
distortion (Cont’d)
1-24
Specification
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
With MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier
turned on:
Or with MS2840A-067/167 and with Microwave Preselector Bypass
turned off:
At mixer input level = –45 dBm
Harmonics [dBc] SHI [dBm]
≤–50 Nominal
≥+5 Nominal
(10 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 300 MHz)
≤–55 Nominal
≥+10 Nominal
(300 MHz < Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz)
≤–45 Nominal
≥0 Nominal
(2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 13.25 GHz)
≤–40 Nominal
≥–5 Nominal
(13.25 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 22.25 GHz)
When Attenuator Mode is E-ATT Combined:
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier
turned off:
At mixer input level = –30 dBm
Harmonics [dBc] SHI [dBm]
≤–60
≥+30
(10 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 300 MHz, RF input level ≤ –5 dBm)
≤–65
≥+35
(300 MHz < Input frequency ≤ 1 GHz, RF input level ≤ –5 dBm)
≤–65
≥+35
(1 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Normal, RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
(1 GHz < Input frequency < 1.75 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious, RF input level ≤+5 dBm)
At mixer input level = –20 dBm
Harmonics [dBc] SHI [dBm]
≤–80
≥+60
(2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Normal, RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
(1.75 GHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious, RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Specification
Secondary harmonic wave
distortion (Cont’d)
At mixer input level = –20 dBm
Harmonics [dBc]
SHI [dBm]
≤–80 Nominal
≥+60 Nominal
(2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal,
–5 dBm<RF input level ≤ +15 dBm)
(1.75 GHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious,
–5 dBm<RF input level ≤ +15 dBm)
SHI: Second Harmonic Intercept
Residual response
Frequency ≥1 MHz, Input attenuator = 0 dB, at 50  terminator
(With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 installed,
excluding Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.)
1 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 1 GHz
≤ –100 dBm
1 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
≤ –90 dBm typ.
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
≤ –90 dBm Nominal
13.6 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
≤ –90 dBm Nominal.
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
≤ –80 dBm Nominal.
Connector
RF input
Connector With MS2840A-040/041/044,
Front panel, N-J, 50 
VSWR: Input attenuator ≥10 dB, 18 to 28ºC
≤ 1.2 (Nominal)
(40 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3 GHz)
≤ 1.3 (Nominal)
(3 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
≤ 1.5 (Nominal)
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤ 1.6 (Nominal)
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.6 GHz)
≤ 1.9 (Nominal)
(13.6 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-046,
Front panel, N-J, 50 
VSWR: Input attenuator ≥10 dB, 18 to 28ºC
≤ 1.2 (Nominal)
(40 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3 GHz)
≤ 1.3 (Nominal)
(3 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤ 1.3 (Nominal)
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.6 GHz)
≤ 1.4 (Nominal)
(13.6 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ 1.6 (Nominal)
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ 1.6 (Reference value with the V-K converter mounted and included)
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
1-25
1
Overview
At mixer input level = –30 dBm
Harmonics [dBc]
SHI [dBm]
≤–60 Nominal
≥+30 Nominal
(10 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 300 MHz, RF input level ≤ 0 dBm)
≤–65 Nominal
≥+35 Nominal
(300 MHz < Input frequency ≤ 1 GHz, RF input level ≤ +15 dBm)
≤–65 Nominal
≥+35 Nominal
(1 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Normal, RF input level ≤ +15 dBm)
(1 GHz < Input frequency < 1.75 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious, RF input level ≤ +15 dBm)
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Specification
RF output
Connector
1st Local Output
Output
Input
Connector
External reference input
Connector
Frequency
Operating range
Input Level
Reference signal output
Connector
Frequency
Output Level
Sweep Status Output
Connector
Output Level
SA Trigger Input
Connector
Input Level
SG Trigger Input
Connector
Input Level
External controls
Ethernet
(10/100/1000Base-T)
Connector
GPIB
Connector
Interface function
This is available when MS2840A-020/120/021/121 is installed.
Front panel, N-J, 50  (Nominal value)
Refer to MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Vector Signal Generator
Operation Manual Operation.
This is available when MS2840A-044/046 is installed.
Connector for External Mixer
Local signal: Frequency 5 to 10 GHz, output level 10 dBm typ.
Bias current: Range 0.0 to 20.0 mA / Resolution 0.1 mA
IF signal: Frequency 1875 MHz
Front panel, SMA-J, 50  (Nominal)
Rear panel, BNC-J, 50  (Nominal)
5 MHz/10 MHz/13 MHz
±1 ppm
–15 dBm ≤ level ≤ +20 dBm, 50  (AC coupling)
Rear panel, BNC-J, 50  (Nominal value)
10 MHz
≥ 0 dBm (AC coupling)
Rear panel, BNC-J
TTL level (high level at sweep or waveform acquisition)
Rear panel, BNC-J
TTL level
Available with MS2840A-020/120/021/121 installed.
Rear panel, BNC-J
TTL level
Control from external controller (except power)
Connector Rear panel, RJ-45
IEEE488.2 compatible
Rear panel, IEEE488 bus connector
SH1, AH1, T6, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT0, C0, E2
USB (B)
Connector USB2.0 compatible
Rear panel, USB-B connector
1-26
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
USB
Specification
Monitor Output
Connector Rear panel, VGA compatibility, mini D-SUB 15 pin
Aux
Used for the input/output of an auxiliary device.
Connector Rear panel, 50 pins (DX10A-50S equivalent part)
This is available when MS2840A-044/046 is installed.
IF Output
Outputs the signal for the 1st IF output connector before band filtering.
Connector Rear panel, SMA-J, 50  (Nominal)
Output frequency 1875 MHz
Gain –10 dB (Nominal, ATT = 0 dB, at 10 GHz input frequency)
Connector for Noise Source This is available when MS2840A-017/117 is installed.
Connector Rear panel, BNC-J
Output voltage range +28 V0.5 V, Pulsed
Display
XGA color LCD (Resolution: 1024 × 768)
Size: 8.4” (213 mm diagonal)
External Mixer
This is available when MS2840A-044/046 is installed.
Frequency Frequency range: 26.5 to 325 GHz
Frequency band Band
Frequency range
Mixing order
configuration Band VHP 50.0 to 75.0 GHz
8+
Band EHP 60.0 to 90.0 GHz
12–
Band A
26.5 to 40.0 GHz
4+
Band Q
33.0 to 50.0 GHz
5+
Band U
40.0 to 60.0 GHz
6+
Band V
50.0 to 75.0 GHz
8+
Band E
60.0 to 90.0 GHz
9+
Band W
75.0 to 110.0 GHz
11+
Band F
90.0 to 140.0 GHz
14+
Band D
110.0 to 170.0 GHz
17+
Band G
140.0 to 220.0 GHz
22+
Band Y
170.0 to 260.0 GHz
26+
Band J
220.0 to 325.0 GHz
33+
Amplitude Setting range of mixer conversion loss
0 to 99.9 dB
Maximum input level Depends on External Mixer
Average noise level Depends on External Mixer
Frequency response Depends on External Mixer
Input/Output Applicable mixer: Two-port mixer only
Local frequency
5 to 10 GHz
IF frequency
1875 MHz
1-27
1
Overview
Used to connect the USB power sensor or to connect a USB memory
stick for saving and reading the files (parameters, waveforms, screen
copies, etc.).
Connector USB 2.0 compatible
USB-A connector (2 ports on front panel, 2 ports on rear panel)
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-1 Specifications for Mainframe (Cont’d)
Item
Specification
Overall Specifications
Mass, Weight
Dimensions 177 mm (h) × 426 mm (w) × 390 mm (d) (excluding protrusions)
Weight ≤ 14.5 kg (with MS2840A-040/041 and MS2840A-020/021 options
installed; excludes all other options)
≤ 15.3 kg (with MS2840A-044/046 installed; excludes all other options)
Power Supply
Voltage Rated Voltage: AC 100 to 120 V or 200 to 240 V *
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption ≤350 VA (including all options, maximum value)
140 VA Nominal
(With MS2840A-040/041 installed, excluding other options)
220 VA Nominal
(With MS2840A-040/041, -020/021 and -022 installed, excluding other
options)
220 VA Nominal
(With MS2840A-044/046 installed, excluding other options)
Temperature
Operating temperature 0 to 50°C
Storage temperature –20 to +60°C
Environment Performance
Conducted emission
Conforms to EN 61326-1
Radiated emission
Conforms to EN 61326-1
Harmonic current emission Conforms to EN 61000-3-2: +A1: A2:
Electrostatic discharge
Conforms to EN 61326-1
Electromagnetic field
Conforms to EN 61326-1
immunity
Fast transient/burst
Conforms to EN 61326-1
Surge
Conforms to EN 61326-1
Conducted RF
Conforms to EN 61326-1
Power frequency magnetic
Conforms to EN 61326-1
field
Voltage dips/short
Conforms to EN 61326-1
interruption
*:
1-28
Operating voltage: within the range of +10% to –15% from the rated
voltage
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function
Item
Trace mode
1
Displays the waveforms of Spectrum, Power vs Time, and others from
the data obtained for certain amount of time.
Spectrum, Power vs Time, Frequency vs Time, CCDF, Spectrogram,
Phase vs Time, No Trace
Bandwidth
Specifies the capture analysis bandwidth from the center frequency
1 kHz to 10 MHz (1-2.5-5 sequence)
(With MS2840A-006/106)
1 kHz to 25 MHz (1-2.5-5 sequence), 31.25 MHz
(With MS2840A-005/105 or MS2840A-009/109 installed.)
1 kHz to 25 MHz (1-2.5-5 sequence), 31.25 MHz, 50 MHz, 62.5 MHz
(With MS2840A-077/177 installed.)
1 kHz to 25 MHz (1-2.5-5 sequence), 31.25 MHz, 50 MHz, 62.5 MHz,
100 MHz, 125 MHz (With MS2840A-078/178 installed.)
Sampling rate
Automatically set depending on analysis bandwidth
2 kHz to 20 MHz (1-2-5 sequence)
(With MS2840A-006/106)
2 kHz to 50 MHz (1-2-5 sequence)
(With MS2840A-005/105, MS2840A-009/109 installed.)
2 kHz to 100 MHz (1-2-5 sequence)
(With MS2840A-077/177 installed.)
2 kHz to 200 MHz (1-2-5 sequence)
(With MS2840A-078/178 installed.)
1-29
Overview
Common
Function
Specification
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Capture time
Capture Time Length
Minimum capture time:
Maximum capture time:
Setting mode
Specification
Sets the capture time length
2 s to 50 ms
(determined depending on analysis bandwidth)
2 to 2000 s
(determined depending on analysis bandwidth)
Auto, Manual
(With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 not installed or Bandwidth ≤ 31.25
MHz.)
Capture Time Length
Minimum capture time:
Maximum capture time:
Setting mode
Sets the capture time length.
1 s
500 ms
Auto, Manual
(With MS2840A-077/177 installed and Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.)
Capture Time Length
Minimum capture time:
Maximum capture time:
Setting mode
Sets the capture time length.
500 ns to 1 s
(determined depending on analysis bandwidth)
500 ms
Auto, Manual
(With MS2840A-078/178 installed and Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.)
Trigger
Trigger mode Free Run (Trig Off), Video, Wide IF Video, Frame, External (TTL)
SG Marker (With MS2840A-020/120/021/121)
ADC resolution
16 bits
(With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 not installed or Bandwidth ≤ 31.25
MHz.)
Spectrum indicator function
Function overview
Displays the spectrum for arbitrary time length and frequency range in
the acquired waveform data.
Analysis time range
Analysis Start Time Sets analysis start time position from beginning of waveform data.
Analysis Time Length Sets analysis time span.
Setting mode Auto, Manual
1-30
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Frequency
Specification
Center frequency and SPAN can be set within the frequency range in
waveform data.
(MS2840A-040)
0 MHz to 3.6 GHz
(MS2840A-041)
0 MHz to 6 GHz
0 MHz to 26.5 GHz
(MS2840A-044)
0 MHz to 44.5 GHz
(MS2840A-046)
(With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 not installed or Bandwidth ≤ 31.25
MHz.)
300 MHz to 3.6 GHz (MS2840A-040)
300 MHz to 6 GHz
(MS2840A-041)
(With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 installed and Bandwidth > 31.25
MHz.)
300 MHz to 6 GHz
(MS2840A-044)
300 MHz to 6 GHz
(MS2840A-046)
(With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 installed but MS2840A-067/167 not
installed and Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.)
Display frequency accuracy
300 MHz to 26.5 GHz (MS2840A-044)
300 MHz to 44.5 GHz (MS2840A-046)
(With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 and MS2840A-067/167 installed and
Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.)
±[Indicator frequency × reference frequency accuracy + SPAN
frequency × reference frequency accuracy + RBW × 0.05 + 2 × N +
SPAN frequency / (Trace point count – 1)] Hz
N: Mixer harmonic order
Resolution bandwidth
(RBW)
Setting range 1 Hz to 1 MHz (1-3 sequence)
Selectivity (–60 dB/–3 dB) 4.5:1, Nominal
(With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 not installed or Bandwidth ≤ 31.25
MHz.)
Setting range 1 Hz to 3 MHz (1-3 sequence)
Selectivity (–60 dB/–3 dB) 4.5:1, Nominal
(With MS2840A-077/177 installed and Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.)
Setting range 1 Hz to 10 MHz (1-3 sequence)
Selectivity (–60 dB/–3 dB ) 4.5:1, Nominal
(With MS2840A-078/178 installed and Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.)
1-31
Overview
Frequency settings
1
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Absolute amplitude accuracy
Specification
At 18 to 28ºC, RBW = Auto, Time Detection = Average,
Marker Result = Integration or Peak (Accuracy),
Center frequency, CW, excluding the noise floor effect
With Preamplifier turned off:
Input attenuator ≥ 10 dB,
Mixer input level ≤ –10 dBm
With Preamplifier turned on:
Input attenuator = 10 dB, preamplifier input level ≤ –30 dBm
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off,
and Without MS2840A-066/166 or with MS2840A-066/166 turned off:
±0.5 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off,
and With MS2840A-066/166 or with MS2840A-066/166 turned on:
±0.5 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3 GHz)
±1.8 dB
(3 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz)
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on,
and Without MS2840A-066/166 or with MS2840A-066/166 turned off:
±1.0 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on,
and With MS2840A-066/166 and with MS2840A-066/166 turned on:
±1.0 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3 GHz)
±1.8 dB
(3 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz)
1-32
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Specification
Absolute amplitude accuracy
(Cont’d)
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Without MS2840A-068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier turned off:
±0.5 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±3.0 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±3.0 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±3.5 dB Nominal
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and Preamplifier turned on:
±1.0 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±2.0 dB
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±3.0 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±4.0 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±4.0 dB Nominal
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
The absolute amplitude accuracy is calculated from an RSS (root
summed square) error of the RF frequency characteristics, linear error
and input attenuator switching error.
1-33
1
Overview
Item
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
In-band frequency
characteristics
Specification
With MS2840A-040/041 installed
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 not installed or Bandwidth ≤ 31.25
MHz, On the basis of a level of the center frequency, at 18 to 28°C
Without MS2840A-066/166, or with MS2840A-066/166 turned off:
in center frequency ±10 MHz
±0.31 dB
(30 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-066/166 and operating,
in center frequency ±10 MHz
±0.31 dB
(30 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-044/046 installed
With MS2840A-067/167/068/168/077/177/078/178 not installed or
Bandwidth ≤ 31.25 MHz, On the basis of a level of the center frequency,
at 18 to 28°C
in center frequency ±10 MHz
±0.31 dB
(30 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
See section 1.3.17 “Analysis Bandwidth Extension Option, 62.5
MHz/125 MHz (MS2840A-077/177/078/178)” for “With
MS2840A-077/177/078/178, Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz”.
1-34
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
Specification
1-35
1
Overview
With MS2840A-040/041 installed
Without MS2840A-066/166,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off:
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB
100 kHz
–131.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–150.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–148.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–146.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz]
Without MS2840A-066/166,
With MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned on
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB
100 kHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–153.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–163.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–162.5 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–161.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041, Frequency Band Mode: Normal
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–158.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–158.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–158.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-066/166 installed
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB,
100 kHz
–130.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz
–140.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–149.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–147.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041 installed
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
(Cont’d)
1-36
Specification
With MS2840A-066/166 and with ,MS2840A-066/166 turned off,
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on,
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB,
100 kHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–152.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–162.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–161.5 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–159.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041 installed, Frequency Band Mode: Normal
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–155.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041 installed, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–155.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041 installed,
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–155.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-066/166 and with ,MS2840A-066/166 turned on,
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on,
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB,
100 kHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–152.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–159.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–158.5 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–155.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz
–151.5 [dBm/Hz]
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
(Cont’d)
1
Specification
Overview
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Without MS2840A-067/167/068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier
turned off,
Frequency Band Mode: Normal
100 kHz
–131.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–150.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–147.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–148.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–146.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–137.5 [dBm/Hz]
Without MS2840A-067/167 and with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, and
with Preamplifier turned off, Frequency Band Mode: Normal
100 kHz
–131.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–150.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–147.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–142.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–138.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–138.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–132.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–129.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-067/167
See section 1.3.15 “Microwave Preselector Bypass Option
(MS2840A-067/167)”.
1-37
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
(Cont’d)
1-38
Specification
Without MS2840A-067/167 and with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, and
with Preamplifier turned on, Frequency Band Mode: Normal
100 kHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–153.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–163.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–161.5 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–160.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–157.5 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–157.5 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–160.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–160.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-044 installed
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–154.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046 installed
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–157.5 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–157.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–154.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–146.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046 installed,
With MS2840A-019/119
See section 1.3.21 “2 dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave
Option (MS2840A-019/119)”.
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Specification
1-39
1
Overview
Measurement function
Adjacent Channel Power
Measurement (ACP)
Reference Span Total, Carrier Total, Both Sides of Carriers or Carrier Select
Adjacent channel 3 channels × 2
specification
Channel Power
Absolute value dBm, dBm/Hz
measurement
Occupied Bandwidth (OBW) N% of Power method, X dB Down method
Power vs Time Display Function
Function overview
Indicates time changes of power for captured waveform data.
Analysis time range
Analysis Start Time Sets analysis start time position from beginning of waveform data.
Analysis Time Length Sets analysis time span.
Setting mode Auto, Manual
Resolution bandwidth
Filter type Rect, Gaussian, Nyquist, Root Nyquist, Off (default: Off)
Roll-off rate setting 0.01 to 1 (settable for Nyquist and Root Nyquist)
Filter frequency offset Filter center frequency can be set within frequency band of waveform
data.
Peak to Peak measurement
Measured using AM Depth or marker function.
+Peak, –Peak, (P-P)/2, Average
Burst Average Power
Measures average power of burst signal.
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Specification
Frequency vs Time Display Function
Function overview
Displays frequency time fluctuations of input signal from captured
waveform data.
Analysis time range
Analysis Start Time Sets analysis start time position from beginning of waveform data.
Analysis Time Length Sets analysis time span.
Setting mode Auto, Manual
Operating level range
–17 to +30 dBm (Input attenuator ≥ 10 dB)
Frequency (vertical axis)
Center frequency and SPAN can be set within the frequency range in
waveform data
Display frequency range Selectable from 1/25, 1/10, 1/5 and 1/2 of analysis bandwidth
Input frequency range 10 MHz to 6 GHz
Display frequency accuracy
Input level = –17 to +30 dBm, SPAN ≤ 31.25 MHz, scale = SPAN/25:
At CW input
±(reference oscillator accuracy × center frequency + indicator frequency
range×0.01) Hz
Peak to Peak measurement Measured using FM Depth or marker function.
+Peak, –Peak, (P-P)/2, Average
CCDF Display Function
Function overview
Displays CCDF and APD of waveform data captured at specific time.
Analysis time range
Analysis Start Time Sets analysis start time position from beginning of waveform data.
Analysis Time Length Sets analysis time span.
Setting mode Auto, Manual
Display
Graphically displays CCDF and APD.
Histogram resolution 0.01 dB
Numerical value Average Power, Max Power, Crest Factor
Resolution Bandwidth
Filter type Rectangle, Off (default: Off)
Filter frequency offset Filter center frequency can be set within frequency band of waveform
data.
1-40
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Specification
1-41
1
Overview
Spectrogram Display Function
Function overview
Displays the spectrum for selected time length in the acquired
waveform data.
Analysis time range
Analysis Start Time Sets analysis start time position from beginning of waveform data.
Analysis Time Length Sets analysis time span.
Setting mode Auto, Manual
Frequency
Center frequency and SPAN can be set within the frequency range in
waveform data.
Resolution bandwidth
(RBW)
Setting range 1 Hz to 1 MHz (1-3 sequence)
Selectivity (–60 dB/–3 dB ) 4.5:1, Nominal value
Digitize function
Function overview
Capable of outputting captured waveform data to internal SSD or
external device
Waveform data
Format I, Q (32-bit Float Binary format)
Level (I2 + Q2) = 1 at 0 dBm input
Level accuracy Same as absolute amplitude accuracy of signal analyzer
External output
Capable of outputting to external PC through Ethernet
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Replay Function
Function overview
Conditions for measurable
waveform data
Conditions for measurable
waveform data
1-42
Specification
Analyzes traces of saved waveform data
I, Q (Binary format)
SPAN
1 kHz
2.5 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
25 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
250 kHz
500 kHz
1 MHz
2.5 MHz
5 MHz
10 MHz
18.6 MHz
20 MHz
25 MHz
31.25 MHz
50 MHz
62.5 MHz
100 MHz
125 MHz
Sampling rate
2 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
25 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
200 kHz
500 kHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
5 MHz
10 MHz
20 MHz
20 MHz
25 MHz
50 MHz
50 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
200 MHz
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-2 Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function (Cont’d)
Item
Combinations of SPAN and
minimum capture sample
Analysis Time Range
Available Mode
Analysis Start Time
Analysis Time Length
Phase (Vertical Axis)
Display Mode
Phase Display Range
Offset
SPAN
1 kHz
2.5 kHz
5 kHz
10 kHz
25 kHz
50 kHz
100 kHz
250 kHz
500 kHz
1 MHz
2.5 MHz
5 MHz
10 MHz
18.6 MHz
20 MHz
25 MHz
31.25 MHz
50 MHz
62.5 MHz
100 MHz
125 MHz
Minimum Capture Sample
74000 (37 s)
160000 (32 s)
310000 (31 s)
610000 (30.5 s)
730000 (14.6 s)
730000 (7.3 s)
730000 (3.65 s)
730000 (1.46 s)
730000 (730 ms)
730000 (365 ms)
730000 (146 ms)
730000 (73 ms)
730000 (36.5 ms)
730000 (36.5 ms)
730000 (29.2 ms)
730000 (14.6 ms)
730000 (14.6 ms)
730000 (7.3 ms)
730000 (7.3 ms)
730000 (3.65 ms)
730000 (3.65 ms)
Overview
Phase vs Time
Function overview
1
Specification
Displays the phase time fluctuation of the input signal in the acquired
waveform data.
Auto, Manual
Sets analysis start time position from beginning of waveform data.
Sets analysis time span.
Wrap, Unwrap
0.01 deg./div to 200 Gdeg./div
100 to 100 Mdeg.
1-43
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function
Item
Specification
Frequency
SPAN
Range 0 Hz, 300 Hz to 3.6 GHz (MS2840A-040)
0 Hz, 300 Hz to 6 GHz
(MS2840A-041)
0 Hz, 300 Hz to 1 MHz
(MS2840A-066/166 turned on)
0 Hz, 300 Hz to 26.5 GHz (MS2840A-044)
0 Hz, 300 Hz to 44.5 GHz (MS2840A-046)
Resolution 2 Hz
SPAN accuracy ±0.2% When number of trace points = 10001
Display frequency accuracy ±[Indicator frequency × reference frequency accuracy + SPAN
frequency × SPAN accuracy + RBW × 0.05 + 2 × N + SPAN
frequency/(Trace point count–1)] Hz
N is Mixing order
Resolution bandwidth
(RBW)
Settable range 1 Hz to 3 MHz (1-3 sequence),
500 Hz, 50 kHz, 2 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 20 MHz, 31.25 MHz
1 Hz to 10 Hz: Not available when SPAN = 0 Hz
31.25 MHz: Available when SPAN = 0 Hz
When MS2840A-046 is installed, 20 MHz and 31.25 MHz are not
available.
Selectivity (–60 dB/–3 dB) 4.5:1, Nominal value, when 1 Hz to 10 MHz is set.
Video bandwidth (VBW)
Setting range 1 Hz to 10 MHz (1-3 sequence), 5 kHz, off
VBW mode Video Average/Power Average
1-44
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
1
Specification
Amplitude
At 18 to 28ºC, Detector = Sample, VBW = 1 Hz (Video Average), Input
attenuator 0 dB,
With MS2840A-040/041,
Without MS2840A-066/166,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off
9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz
–120 [dBm/Hz]
100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz
–134 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041,
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–146 [dBm/Hz]
Without MS2840A-066/166,
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on
100 kHz
–147 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–156 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–166 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–165 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–164 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041,
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–161 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041,
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–161 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-066/166, and
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off
9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz
–120 [dBm/Hz]
100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz
–133 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz
–143 [dBm/Hz]
10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–152 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–147 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041 installed,
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
1-45
Overview
Display average noise level
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
(Cont’d)
Specification
At 18 to 28ºC, Detector = Sample, VBW = 1 Hz (Video Average), Input
attenuator 0 dB,
With MS2840A-066/166, with MS2840A-066/166 turned off,
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on:
100 kHz
–146 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–155 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–162 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–161 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–158 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041 installed,
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–154 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041 installed,
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–154 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-066/166, with MS2840A-066/166 turned on,
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on:
100 kHz
–146 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–155 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–162 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–161 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–158 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz
–154 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Without MS2840A-067/167/068/168/069/169, Frequency Band Mode:
Normal
9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz
–120 [dBm/Hz]
100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz
–134 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–147 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤4 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤6 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤13.5 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤18.3 GHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤26.5 GHz
–146 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046,
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–146 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤40 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤44.5 GHz
–140 [dBm/Hz]
1-46
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
(Cont’d)
Specification
With MS2840A-046
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–141 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–135 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–132 [dBm/Hz]
Without MS2840A-067/167 or with MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and
with Preamplifier turned on, at Frequency Band Mode: Normal
100 kHz
–147 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–156 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–166 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–164 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–163 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–163 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–163 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-044
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–157 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–157 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-067/167
See section 1.3.15 “Microwave Preselector Bypass Option
(MS2840A-067/167)”.
With MS2840A-046 installed,
With MS2840A-019/119
See section 1.3.21 “2 dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave
Option (MS2840A-019/119)”.
1-47
1
Overview
Without MS2840A-067/167 and with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, and
with Preamplifier turned off, at Frequency Band Mode: Normal
9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz
–120 [dBm/Hz]
100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz
–134 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–147 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–147 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–145 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–141 [dBm/Hz]
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Absolute amplitude
accuracy
Specification
At 18 to 28ºC, Auto Sweep Time Select = Normal,
30 Hz ≤ RBW ≤ 1 MHz, Detection = Positive, Without
MS2840A-051/151 or with Noise Floor Reduction turned off, CW,
excluding the noise floor effect, and not when FFT is being executed
(displayed on the screen).
With Preamplifier turned off:
Input attenuator ≥ 10 dB,
Mixer input level ≤ –10 dBm
With Preamplifier turned on:
Input attenuator = 10 dB, preamplifier input level ≤ –30 dBm,
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off,
and without MS2840A-066/166 or with MS2840A-066/166 turned off
±0.5 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off,
and with MS2840A-066/166 and with MS2840A-066/166 turned on:
±0.5 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3 GHz)
±1.8 dB
(3 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz)
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on,
and without MS2840A-066/166 or with MS2840A-066/166 turned off:
±1.0 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-008/108 and with Preamplifier turned on,
and with MS2840A-066/166 and with MS2840A-066/166 turned on:
±1.0 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3 GHz)
±1.8 dB
(3 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.7 GHz)
1-48
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Absolute amplitude
accuracy (Cont’d)
Specification
1-49
1
Overview
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Without MS2840A-068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier turned off
±0.5 dB
(300 kHz ≤frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±3.0 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±3.0 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±3.5 dB Nominal
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier turned on
±1.0 dB
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±2.0 dB
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±3.0 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±4.0 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±4.0 dB Nominal
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
The absolute amplitude accuracy is calculated from an RSS (root
summed square) error of the RF frequency characteristics, linearity
error and input attenuator switching error.
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Spurious Response
Two-tone third-order
intermodulation distortion
1-50
Specification
With MS2840A-040/041
Without MS2840A-008/108, or with Preamplifier turned off:
At 18 to 28°C, with mixer input level = –15 dBm (per wave) and
using ≥ 300 kHz separation, at RBW ≤ 30 kHz:
≤ –54 dBc (TOI = +12 dBm)
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 300 MHz)
≤–62 dBc (TOI = +16 dBm)
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode:
Spurious)
≤–60 dBc (TOI = +15 dBm)
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-008/108 installed and with Preamplifier turned on
At 18 to 28°C, with Preamplifier input level = –45 dBm (per wave)
and using ≥ 300 kHz separation, at RBW ≤30 kHz:
≤–74 dBc (TOI = –8 dBm) Nominal
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 300 MHz)
≤–79 dBc (TOI = –5.5 dBm) Nominal
(300 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 700 MHz)
≤–82 dBc (TOI = –4 dBm) Nominal
(700 MHz < frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(700 MHz < frequency < 3.5 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≤–79 dBc (TOI = –5.5 dBm) Nominal
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Attenuator Mode = E-ATT Combined,
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169, or with Preamplifier
turned off:
At 18 to 28°C, with mixer input level = –15 dBm (per wave) and
using ≥ 300 kHz separation, at RBW ≤ 30 kHz:
≤ –54 dBc (TOI = +12 dBm)
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 300 MHz, RF input level ≤ –5 dBm)
≤–62 dBc (TOI = +16 dBm)
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz, RF input level ≤ –5 dBm)
≤–62 dBc (TOI = +16 dBm)
(1 GHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal,
RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
(1 GHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious,
RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
≤–60 dBc (TOI = +15 dBm)
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal,
RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious,
RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
≤ –54 dBc (TOI = +12 dBm) Nominal
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 300 MHz,
–5 dBm < RF input level ≤ 0 dBm)
≤–62 dBc (TOI = +16 dBm) Nominal
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz,
–5 dBm < RF input level ≤ +15 dBm)
≤–60 dBc (TOI = +15 dBm) Nominal
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal,
–5 dBm < RF input level ≤ +15 dBm)
1-51
1
Overview
Two-tone third-order
intermodulation distortion
(Cont’d)
Specification
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Two-tone third-order
intermodulation distortion
(Cont’d)
Specification
With MS2840A-044/046 installed
Without MS2840A-068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier turned off,
At 18 to 28°C, with mixer input level = –15 dBm (per wave) and
using ≥ 300 kHz separation, at RBW ≤30 kHz:
≤–54 dBc (TOI = +12 dBm)
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 300 MHz)
≤–62 dBc (TOI = +16 dBm)
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
≤–60 dBc (TOI = +15 dBm)
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
≤–56 dBc (TOI = +13 dBm)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≤–56 dBc (TOI = +13 dBm)
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤–56 dBc (TOI = +13 dBm)
(13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤–56 dBc (TOI = +13 dBm) Nominal
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz) With MS2840A-046 installed
With MS2840A-044/046 installed
With MS2840A-067/167 and with Microwave Preselector Bypass
turned off, and with MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and with
Preamplifier turned on, At 18 to 28°C, with Preamplifier input level
= –45 dBm (per wave) and using ≥ 300 kHz separation, at RBW ≤ 30
kHz:
≤–73 dBc (TOI = –8.5 dBm) Nominal
(30 MHz ≤ frequency < 300 MHz)
≤–78 dBc (TOI = –6 dBm) Nominal
(300 MHz ≤ frequency ≤ 700 MHz)
≤–81 dBc (TOI = –4.5 dBm) Nominal
(700 MHz < frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(700 MHz < frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≤–78 dBc (TOI = –6 dBm) Nominal
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≤–70 dBc (TOI = –10 dBm) Nominal
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
≤–70 dBc (TOI = –10 dBm) Nominal
(13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤–70 dBc (TOI = –10 dBm) Nominal
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz) With MS2840A-046 installed
1-52
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
When Attenuator Mode is E-ATT Combined
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier
turned off, at 18 to 28°C, with mixer input level = –15 dBm (per
wave) and using ≥ 300 kHz separation, at RBW ≤30 kHz
≤–54 dBc (TOI = +12 dBm)
(30 MHz≦frequency < 300 MHz, RF input level ≤ –5 dBm)
≤–62 dBc (TOI = +16 dBm)
(300 MHz≦frequency ≤ 1 GHz, RF input level ≤ –5 dBm)
≤–62 dBc (TOI = +16 dBm)
(1 GHz < frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal,
RF input level ≤ +5 dBm, )
(1 GHz < frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious,
RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
≤–60 dBc (TOI = +15 dBm)
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal,
RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
≤–56 dBc (TOI = +13 dBm)
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious,
RF input level ≤ +5 dBm)
≤–54 dBc (TOI = +12 dBm) Nominal
(30 MHz≤ frequency < 300 MHz,
–5 dBm < RF input level ≤0 dBm)
≤–62 dBc (TOI = +16 dBm) Nominal
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal,
–5 dBm < RF input level ≤+15 dBm)
(300 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz,
Frequency Band Mode: Spurious,
–5 dBm < RF input level ≤+15 dBm)
≤–60 dBc (TOI = +15 dBm) Nominal
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal,
–5 dBm < RF input level ≤+15 dBm)
≤–56 dBc (TOI = +13 dBm) Nominal
(3.5 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious,
–5 dBm < RF input level ≤+15 dBm)
1-53
1
Overview
Two-tone third-order
intermodulation distortion
(Cont’d)
Specification
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Image response
Multiple Response
1-54
Specification
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Frequency Band Mode: Normal
≤–70 dBc
(10 MHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz)
≤–55 dBc
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
With MS2840A-066/166 installed and operating (066/166: Enabled,
Center frequency: 3.6 GHz or less, and SPAN ≤ 1 MHz as spectrum
analyzer).
≤–10 dBc (This is generated at “input signal + 150 MHz”.)
(110 MHz ≤ frequency < 3.7 GHz)
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Frequency Band Mode: Normal
When MS2840A-067/167 is NOT installed
≤–70 dBc
(10 MHz ≤ frequency < 4 GHz)
≤–55 dBc
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤–70 dBc
(6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤–70 dBc
(13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤–70 dBc Nominal
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
With MS2840A-066/166 installed and operating (066/166: Enabled,
Center frequency: 3.7 GHz or less, and SPAN ≤ 1 MHz as spectrum
analyzer), and Mixer input level: –15 dBm.
≤–10 dBc Nominal
(110 MHz<frequency≦3.7 GHz)
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
1
Single, Continuous
Overview
Sweep
Sweep mode
Sweep time
Specification
Setting range 1 ms to 1000 s (SPAN ≥ 300 Hz)
1 s to 1000 s (SPAN = 0 Hz)
Detection mode
Pos&Neg, Positive Peak, Sample, Negative Peak, RMS
CISPR detector
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Quasi-Peak, CISPR-AVG, RMS-AVG
The number of trace points When SPAN > 30 GHz:
5001, 10001
When 500 MHz < SPAN ≤ 30 GHz:
1001, 2001, 5001, 10001
When 100 MHz < SPAN ≤ 500 MHz:
101, 201, 251, 401, 501, 1001, 2001, 5001, 10001
When 300 Hz≤SPAN≤100 MHz and Sweep Time > 10 s:
101, 201, 251, 401, 501, 1001, 2001, 5001, 10001
When 300 Hz≤SPAN≤100 MHz and Sweep Time ≤10 s:
11, 21, 41, 51, 101, 201, 251, 401, 501, 1001, 2001, 5001, 10001
When Span = 0 Hz:
11, 21, 41, 51, 101, 201, 251, 401, 501, 1001, 2001, 5001, 10001
Scale
Log indicator 10div/12div : 0.1 to 20 dB/div, 1-2-5 sequence
Lin indicator 10div : 1 to 10%/div, 1-2-5 sequence
Trigger function
Trigger mode Free Run (Trig Off), Video, Wide IF Video, External, Frame
SG Marker (With MS2840A-020/120/021/121)
Gate function
Gate mode Off, Wide IF Video, External, Frame
SG Marker (With MS2840A-020/120/021/121)
1-55
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.1-3 Specifications for spectrum analyzer function (Cont’d)
Item
Measurement function
Adjacent Channel Power
Measurement (ACP)
Reference
Adjacent channel
specification
Burst arrange
Channel Power
Absolute value
measurement
Occupied Bandwidth (OBW)
Spectrum Emission Mask
(SEM)
Spurious Emission
Specification
Span Total, Carrier Total, Both Sides of Carriers or Carrier Select
3 channels × 2 (Normal Mode)
8 channels × 2 (Advanced Mode)
Indicates average power of specified time in the time domain mode.
dBm, dBm/Hz
N% of Power method, X dB Down method
Peak/Margin measurement: Pass/fail judgment is performed by
Peak/Margin measurement.
Worst/Peaks measurement: Pass/fail judgment is performed by
Worst/Peaks measurement
Frequency counter
Counter accuracy ±(marker frequency × reference frequency accuracy + (0.1 × N/Gate
Time[s])) Hz)
at SPAN ≤ 1 MHz, RBW = 1 kHz, S/N ≥ 50 dB, Gate Time ≥ 100 ms
Mixer harmonic order [N]
Two-tone third-order
Measures IM3 and TOI from two-tone signal.
intermodulation distortion
1-56
1.3
1.3.2
Specifications
Rubidium Reference Oscillator Option (MS2840A-001/101)
1
Table 1.3.2-1 Rubidium Reference Oscillator Specifications
Items
1.3.3
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Internal reference oscillator”.
Overview
Function and Performance
Specifications
High Stability Reference Oscillator Option (MS2840A-002/102)
Table 1.3.3-1 High Stability Reference Oscillator Option Specifications
Item
Function and Performance
Others
1.3.4
Specification
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Internal reference oscillator”.
This option is not available when MS2840A-044/046 is installed.
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 31.25 MHz Option
(MS2840A-005/105)
Table 1.3.4-1 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 31.25 MHz Option Specifications
Item
Function and Performance
Others
1.3.5
Specification
Function to analyze 31.25 MHz bandwidth
This option is not available when MS2840A-046 is installed.
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 10 MHz Option
(MS2840A-006/106)
Table 1.3.5-1 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 10 MHz Option Specifications
Item
Function and Performance
Specification
Function to analyze 10 MHz bandwidth
1-57
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.6
Preamplifier Option (MS2840A-008/108)
Table 1.3.6-1 lists the specifications for the preamplifier.
The following specification values are those under the conditions after
30-min warm-up at stable ambient temperature. Typical values are only
for reference and are not guaranteed.
Table 1.3.6-1 Preamplifier Option Specifications
Item
Frequency
Frequency range
Amplitude
Measurement range
Maximum input level
Display average noise level
(Signal Analyzer function)
Display average noise level
(Spectrum analyzer
function)
RF Frequency
Characteristics
Input attenuator switching
error
Linearity error
Secondary harmonic wave
distortion
1 dB gain compression
Two-tone third-order
intermodulation distortion
Others
1.3.7
Specification
100 kHz to 3.6 GHz (With MS2840A-040)
100 kHz to 6 GHz (With MS2840A-041/044/046)
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Measurement range”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Maximum input level”.
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Display average noise level”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Display average noise level”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “RF frequency characteristics”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Input attenuator switching error”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Linearity error”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Secondary harmonic wave distortion”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “1 dB gain compression”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Two-tone third-order intermodulation distortion”.
Cannot install simultaneously with MS2840A-068/168/069/169.
Bandwidth Extension to 31.25 MHz for Millimeter-wave Option
(MS2840A-009/109)
Table 1.3.7-1 Bandwidth Extension to 31.25 MHz for Millimeter-wave Specifications
Item
Application
Others
1-58
Specification
Extends the analysis bandwidth to 31.25 MHz in signal analyzer mode.
This option is available when MS2840A-046 is installed.
1.3
1.3.8
Specifications
Phase Noise Measurement Function Option (MS2840A-010/110)
Table 1.3.8-1 Phase Noise Measurement Function Option Specifications
Item
Specification
Displays the phase noise characteristics on a logarithmic scale.
Overview
Function
Frequency
Range 10 MHz to Upper frequency limit
Offset frequency range 10 Hz to 10 MHz
Marker Mode Normal, Integral Noise, RMS Noise, Jitter, Residual FM, Off
1.3.9
1
Secondary SSD Option (MS2840A-011/111)
Table 1.3.9-1 Secondary SSD Option Specifications
Item
Specification
Application
Removable SSD for storing user data
Insert into the Secondary HDD/SSD slot on the back panel to use.
Figure 3.1.1-2 Rear panel “16 Secondary HDD/SSD slot”
1.3.10 Precompliance EMI Function Option (MS2840A-016/116)
Table 1.3.10-1 Precompliance EMI Function Option Specifications
Item
Function
Detection Mode (CISPR
Detector)
Resolution Bandwidth
(CISPR RBW)
Specification
Adds the Detection Mode and the Resolution Bandwidth for EMI
measurement to the Spectrum Analyzer function.
Quasi-Peak, CISPR-AVG, RMS-AVG
200 Hz (6 dB BW), 9 kHz (6 dB BW), 120 kHz (6 dB BW),
1 MHz (Impulse)
1-59
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.11 Noise Figure Measurement Function Option (MS2840A-017/117)
Table 1.3.11-1 Noise Figure Measurement Function Option Specifications
Item
Function
Specification
Adds the function to measure Noise Figure, Noise Factor, Gain and Y
factor.
Frequency
Frequency Setting Range 10 MHz to 3.6 GHz (MS2840A-040)
10 MHz to 6.0 GHz (MS2840A-041)
10 MHz to 26.5 GHz (MS2840A-044)
10 MHz to 44.5 GHz (MS2840A-046)
Frequency Range 30 MHz to 3.6 GHz (MS2840A-040)
30 MHz to 6.0 GHz (MS2840A-041)
30 MHz to 6.0 GHz (MS2840A-044, without MS2840A-069/169)
30 MHz to 26.5 GHz (MS2840A-044, with MS2840A-069/169)
30 MHz to 6.0 GHz (MS2840A-046, without MS2840A-068/168)
30 MHz to 40 GHz
(MS2840A-046, with MS2840A-068/168)
Noise Figure
Within the frequency range (Attenuator = 0 dB, Pre-Amp = On)
Measurement Range:
–20 to +40 dB
ENR
Instrument Uncertainty
4 to 7 dB
±0.02 dB
12 to 17 dB
±0.025 dB
20 to 22 dB
±0.03 dB
Gain
Within the frequency range (Attenuator = 0 dB, Pre-Amp = On)
Measurement Range:
–20 to +40 dB
Instrument Uncertainty ≤ 0.07 dB
Resolution Bandwidth
Setting Range:
100 kHz to 8 MHz
1-60
1.3
Specifications
1.3.12 BER Measurement Function Option (MS2840A-026/126)
1
Table 1.3.12-1 BER Measurement Function Option Specifications
Connector
Input level
Input signal
Input bit rate
Measurable patterns
Synchronization establishing
condition
Re-synchronization judgment
condition
Measurable bit count
Measurable error bit count
Measurement termination
condition
Auto Resync function
Count operation at
resynchronization
Measurement mode
Display
Polarity reversal function
Measured value clear
function
Specification
Rear panel Aux connector
TTL level
Data, Clock, Enable
100 bps to 10 Mbps
PN9, PN11, PN15, PN20, PN23, ALL0, ALL1, repetition of 01
PN9Fix, PN11Fix, PN15Fix, PN20Fix, PN23Fix
UserDefine (4096 bits max.)
PN signal:
No error has been detected for (PN stage count  2)
bits
PNFix signal: Synchronization with the PN signal is established if no
error has been detected for (PN stage count  2) bits.
Next, the cycle and synchronization of the PNFix
signal are established if no error has been detected for
PN stage count bits beginning with the start bit of the
PNFix signal.
ALL0, ALL1, repetition of 01:
No error has been detected for 10 bits.
UserDefine: No error has been detected for 8 to 1024 bits
(variable).
The start bit used for synchronization detection can
also be selected.
x/y (Resynchronization is executed if x bits out of y bits are errors.)
y (Measurement bit count):
Selected from 500 bits, 5000 bits,
and 50000 bits
x (Error bit count out of y bits): 1 to y/2 bits
 232  1 bits
 231  1 bits
Measurement bit count, measurement error bit count
Can be switched between enable/disable.
Can be selected from Count Clear and Count Keep.
Continuous, Single, Endless
Status, Error, Error Rate, Error Count, SyncLoss Count
Measurement bit count
Data, Clock, and Enable polarities can be reversed.
It is possible to clear the measured values to 0 while retaining
synchronization during BER measurement, and start the
measurement again from 0.
1-61
Overview
Item
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.13 Analog Function Extension for Vector Signal Generator Option
(MS2840A-029/129)
Table 1.3.13-1 Analog Function Extension for Vector Signal Generator Option Specifications
Item
Application
Specification
Adds the analog signal generator function to
MS2840A-020/120/021/121 vector signal generator option (with
022/122)
1.3.14 Low Phase Noise Performance Option (MS2840A-066/166)
Summary:
The SSB phase noise is improved for RF input signals by provision of an
internal dedicated frequency converter.
Near-carrier phase noise is reduced by installing the Low Phase Noise
option (MS2830A-066/166) and turning On the Low Phase Noise option
function.
Excellent SSB phase noise performance of MS2840A-066/166:
MS2840A-066/166 is much superior to our previous model in SSB phase
noise performance. The target of our previous model was limited to
narrow-band radio devices (radio devices for professional use) and digital
TV broadcast transmitters. However, the MS2840A-066/166 with the
improved performance can target not only the above devices, but also
built-in oscillators which needed special phase noise measuring
instruments to measure.
Example of Improvement:
The Low Phase Noise Performance option brings the following
improvements.
 Allows near-carrier spurious measurement.
 The adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement is performed with
accuracy because noise power over the adjacent channel is reduced.
 S/N and EVM are improved due to reduced residual FM.
Additionally, installing the Phase Noise Measurement option
(MS2840A-010) allows the following measurements.
 Phase noise characteristics of an oscillator.
 Calculation of residual FM and jitter using the marker.
1-62
1.3
Specifications
Precautions when Low Phase Noise option enabled (On).
The operation principle of the frequency converter is generation of a
spurious response at a specific frequency. As a result, sometimes it is
better not to use, such as when measuring spurious.
The spurious responses are as follows:
(1) Image Response
This response is generated when a signal with frequency fin is input
to the MS2840A RF input connector and the MS2840A Rx frequency
is set to fin –150 MHz, and more than 110 MHz (with
MS2840A-066/166). The generated level is about –20 dBc.
(2) Multiple Response
This response is generated when a signal with frequency fin is input
to the MS2840A RF input connector and the MS2840A Rx frequency
is set to (fin ± 75 MHz)/N – 75 MHz (N = 1,2,3 …),and more than 110
MHz (with MS2840A-066/166). The generated level is about –10 dBc.
1-63
Overview
When the DUT signal frequency is known, when the MS2840A Rx
frequency is set to 35 MHz beyond that frequency, measurement can be
made as if the Low Phase Noise Function is Off (disabled) because the
spurious response cannot be observed.
However, even if the DUT signal frequency is unknown, measurement
can be made after setting the Low Phase Noise Function to Off (disabled)
and verifying the presence of a response at about the same level (in other
words, confirming that the observed signal has the correct response).
1
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.14-1 Low Phase Noise Performance Option Specifications
Item
Frequency
Frequency Range
SPAN
Single side band noise
Resolution bandwidth
(RBW)
Amplitude
Display average noise level
(Signal Analyzer function)
Display average noise level
(Spectrum analyzer
function)
Spurious Response
Image response
Multiple response
Others
1-64
Specification
9 kHz to 3.7 GHz
9 kHz to 3.5 GHz (Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
1 kHz to 31.25 MHz (Signal Analyzer function)
300 Hz to 1 MHz (Spectrum Analyzer function)
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Single side band noise”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Specifications for spectrum analyzer function,
Resolution bandwidth (RBW)”.
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function, Display
average noise level”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Specifications for spectrum analyzer function,
Display average noise level”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Specifications for spectrum analyzer function, Image
response”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Specifications for spectrum analyzer function,
Multiple response”.
This option is not available when MS2840A-044/046 is installed.
1.3
Specifications
1.3.15 Microwave Preselector Bypass Option (MS2840A-067/167)
Summary:
Notes on default values when this option is installed:
To improve the in-band frequency characteristics, the default value is
set to On for the Signal Analyzer function, and is always set to On for
all other applications.
To avoid measuring the image signals generated internally, the
default value is set to Off for the Spectrum Analyzer function.
Table 1.3.15-1 Microwave Preselector Bypass Option Specifications
Item
Intended Use
Function and performance
Frequency
Frequency range
Specification
Bypasses the preselector to improve the RF frequency characteristics
and the in-band frequency characteristics.
When this function is set to On, the image response elimination filter is
bypassed. Therefore, this function is not appropriate for image
response reception and spurious measurement.
4 GHz to 26.5 GHz
4 GHz to 44.5 GHz
(MS2840A-044)
(MS2840A-046)
Amplitude
RF frequency characteristics At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 10 dB,
With Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on,
Without MS2840A-068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier turned off:
±1.00 dB
(6 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.50 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±2.00 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±2.00 dB typ.
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
1-65
1
Overview
By bypassing the preselector (image response elimination filter), the
RF frequency characteristics and the in-band frequency
characteristics are improved, and level accuracy improvement can be
achieved.
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.15-1 Microwave Preselector Bypass Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
RF frequency
characteristics (Cont’d)
Display average noise level
1-66
Specification
With Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on,
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier turned on:
±1.8 dB
(6 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±2.50 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
±3.00 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
±3.00 dB Nominal
(40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
At 18 to 28ºC, Detector = Sample, VBW = 1 Hz (Video Average)
At input attenuator 0 dB,
Irrespective of Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on/off,
Without MS2840A-068/168/069/169 installed,
With MS2840A-044/046,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–147 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz –145 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz –141 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046,
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz –141 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–135 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz –132 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier turned off:
With MS2840A-044/046,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–142 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz –140 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz –136 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046,
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz –136 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–131 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz –128 [dBm/Hz]
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.15-1 Microwave Preselector Bypass Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
(Cont’d)
With Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on,
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier turned on:
With MS2840A-044,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–158 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz –157 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz –152 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–161 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz –161 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz –156 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz –152 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz –143 [dBm/Hz]
With Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off,
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier turned on:
With MS2840A-044,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–162 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz –160 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz –159 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–164 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz –164 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz –159 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz –157 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–155 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz –146 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-019/119
See section 1.3.21 “2 dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option
(MS2840A-019/119)”.
With MS2840A-067/167 and Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off,
–60 dBc (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
–60 dBc (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-067/167 and Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on,
Generated at the frequency at the distance of 1875 MHz × 2
0 dBc Nominal (4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
0 dBc Nominal (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
1-67
1
Overview
Image response
Specification
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.16 Microwave Preamplifier Option (MS2840A-068/168)
This option amplifies signal prior to 1st mixer to enhance sensitivity.
This option is the wideband version of Preamplifier Option
(MS2840A-008/108), and can be used on the application software in a
similar way.
Table 1.3.16-1 Microwave Preamplifier Option Specifications
Item
Frequency
Frequency range
Amplitude
Measurement range
Maximum input level
Display average noise level
(Signal Analyzer function)
Display average noise level
(Spectrum analyzer
function)
RF Frequency
Characteristics
Input attenuator switching
error
Linearity error
Secondary harmonic wave
distortion
1 dB gain compression
Two-tone third-order
intermodulation distortion
Others
1-68
Specification
100 kHz to 44.5 GHz
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Measurement range”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Maximum input
level”.
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function, Display
average noise level”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Display average noise level”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, RF frequency
characteristics”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Input attenuator
switching error”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Linearity error”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Secondary harmonic
wave distortion”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, 1 dB gain
compression”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Specifications for spectrum analyzer function,
Two-tone third-order intermodulation distortion”.
Cannot install simultaneously with MS2840A-008/108.
Dedicated option for MS2840A-046.
Cannot be installed to MS2840A-040/041/044.
1.3
Specifications
1.3.17 26.5GHz Microwave Preamplifier Option (MS2840A-069/169)
This option amplifies signal prior to 1st mixer to enhance sensitivity.
Table 1.3.17-1 26.5GHz Microwave Preamplifier Option Specifications
Item
Frequency
Frequency range
Amplitude
Measurement range
Maximum input level
Display average noise level
(Signal Analyzer function)
Display average noise level
(Spectrum analyzer
function)
RF Frequency
Characteristics
Input attenuator switching
error
Linearity error
Secondary harmonic wave
distortion
1 dB gain compression
Two-tone third-order
intermodulation distortion
Others
Specification
100 kHz to 26.5 GHz
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Measurement range”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Maximum input
level”.
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Specifications for Signal Analyzer Function, Display
average noise level”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Display average noise level”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, RF frequency
characteristics”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Input attenuator
switching error”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Linearity error”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Secondary harmonic
wave distortion”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, 1 dB gain
compression”.
See Table 1.3.1-3, “Specifications for spectrum analyzer function,
Two-tone third-order intermodulation distortion”.
Cannot install simultaneously with MS2840A-008/108.
Dedicated option for MS2840A-044.
Cannot be installed to MS2840A-040/041/046..
1-69
Overview
This option is the wideband version of Preamplifier Option
(MS2840A-008/108), and can be used on the application software in a
similar way.
1
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.18 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 62.5 MHz/125 MHz Option
(MS2840A-077/177/078/178)
Table 1.3.18-1 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 62.5 MHz/125 MHz Option Specifications
Item
Model, Name
Application
Bandwidth
Sampling rate
Capture time
Resolution bandwidth
ADC resolution
Frequency settings
1-70
Specification
MS2840A-077
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 62.5 MHz
MS2840A-177
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 62.5 MHz Retrofit
MS2840A-078
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 125 MHz
MS2840A-178
Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 125 MHz Retrofit
Extends the analysis bandwidth to 62.5 MHz/125 MHz in single
analyzer mode by bypassing a bandwidth-limiting filter such as a
preselector and performing fast sampling.
On the other hand, because an image response is received due to
bypassing the image response elimination filter, this is not adequate
for measuring spurious or out-of-analysis-band signals and analyzing
signals.
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Specifications for signal analyzer function,
Bandwidth”.
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Specifications for signal analyzer function,
Sampling rate”.
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Specifications for signal analyzer function, Capture
time”.
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Specifications for signal analyzer function,
Resolution bandwidth”.
14 bits
See Table 1.3.1-2, “Specifications for signal analyzer function,
Frequency settings”.
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.18-1 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 62.5 MHz/125 MHz Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
1
Specification
Overview
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB
With MS2840A-040/041 installed
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz
Without MS2840A-066/166,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with MS2840A-008/108 and
Preamplifier turned off,
300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–146.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–142.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–139.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz
Without MS2840A-066/166,
With MS2840A-008/108, and Preamplifier turned on
300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–159 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–157 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz
With MS2840A-066/166,
Without MS2840A-008/108, or with MS2840A-008/108 and
Preamplifier turned off
300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–138.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–135.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz
With MS2840A-066/166,
With MS2840A-008/108 and Preamplifier turned on
300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–157 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–156 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-041
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–148 [dBm/Hz]
1-71
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.18-1 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 62.5 MHz/125 MHz Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
(Cont’d)
1-72
Specification
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB
With MS2840A-044/046 installed
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 or with
MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and Preamplifier turned off,
300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–146.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–140.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–137.5 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–137.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz
With MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and Preamplifier turned on,
300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–158 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–156 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 and MS2840A-067/167,
Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz,
Without MS2840A-068/168/069/169,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–137.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–135.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–131.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–131.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–125.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–122.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 and MS2840A-067/167,
Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz,
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169, and Preamplifier turned off,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–132.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–130.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–126.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–126.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–121.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–118.5 [dBm/Hz]
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.18-1 Analysis Bandwidth Extension to 62.5 MHz/125 MHz Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
(Cont’d)
RF frequency
characteristics
Linearity error
Others
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB
With MS2840A-044/046 installed
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 and MS2840A-067/167,
Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz,
With MS2840A-044
With MS2840A-069/169 and Preamplifier turned on,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–146 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-046
With MS2840A-068/168 and Preamplifier turned on,
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–140 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–140 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-019/119
See section 1.3.21 “2 dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave
Option (MS2840A-019/119)”.
With MS2840A-077/177 installed and Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.
To be generated at a frequency that is 200 MHz away.
0 dBc Nominal (300 MHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178 and MS2840A-067/167 installed and
Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz.
To be generated at a frequency that is 1875 MHz × 2 away.
0 dBc Nominal (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, RF frequency
characteristics”.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Linearity error”.
—
1.3.19 3.6GHz Analog Signal Generator Option (MS2840A-088/188)
Table 1.3.19-1 3.6GHz Analog Signal Generator Option Specifications
Item
Application
Specification
Adds the analog signal generator function to MS2840A.
1-73
1
Overview
Image response
Specification
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.20 Vector Function Extension for Analog Signal Generator Option
(MS2840A-189)
Table 1.3.20-1 Vector Function Extension for Analog Signal Generator Option Specifications
Item
Application
Specification
Adds the vector modulation function to MS2840A-088/188.
1.3.21 2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option (MS2840A-019/119)
Table 1.3.21-1 2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option Specifications
Item
Model, Name
Application
Input attenuator
Display average noise level
Signal Analyzer function
1-74
Specification
MS2840A-019
2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave
MS2840A-119
2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Retrofit
Sets the resolution of the Step Attenuator (mechanical) from standard
10 dB to 2 dB in MS2840A-046 44.5 GHz Signal Analyzer.
See Table 1.3.1-1, “Specifications for Mainframe, Input attenuator”.
At 18 to 28ºC, input attenuator = 0 dB
With MS2840A-046 and MS2840A-019/119 installed
Without MS2840A-067/167/068/168
100 kHz
–131.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–150.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–147.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–147.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–146.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–143.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–139.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–134.5 [dBm/Hz]
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.21-1 2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
1
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, and
Preamplifier turned off
100 kHz
–131.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–150.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–147.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–141.5 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–142.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–138.5 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–137.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–132.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–127.5 [dBm/Hz]
Overview
Display average noise level
Signal Analyzer function
(Cont’d)
Specification
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, and
Preamplifier turned on
100 kHz
–144.5 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–153.5 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–163.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–161.5 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–160.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–157.5 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–157.5 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–160.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–160.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–157.5 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–156.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–153.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–146.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, and Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168, or with
MS2840A-008/108/068/168, and Preamplifier turned off:
300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–145.5 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–142.5 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–140.5 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–137.5 [dBm/Hz]
–137.5 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
1-75
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.21-1 2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
Display average noise level
Signal Analyzer function
(Cont’d)
Specification
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz, with
MS2840A-008/108/068/168, and Preamplifier turned on:
300 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–158 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–156 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, with MS2840A-067/167,
Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz, and without MS2840A-068/168:
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–137.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–135.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–131.5 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–130.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–125.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–119.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, with MS2840A-067/167,
Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz, with MS2840A-068/168,
and Preamplifier turned off:
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–132.5 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–130.5 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–126.5 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–125.5 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–121.5 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–115.5 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-077/177/078/178, with MS2840A-067/167,
Bandwidth > 31.25 MHz, with MS2840A-068/168,
and Preamplifier turned on:
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–148 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–140 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–137 [dBm/Hz]
1-76
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.21-1 2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
At 18 to 28ºC, Detector = Sample, VBW = 1 Hz (Video Average), Input
attenuator 0 dB,
With MS2840A-046 and MS2840A-019/119 installed,
Without MS2840A-067/167/068/168, Frequency Band Mode: Normal
9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz
–120 [dBm/Hz]
100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz
–134 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–147 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤4 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤6 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤13.5 GHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤18.3 GHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤26.5 GHz
–146 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–146 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤40 GHz
–142 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤44.5 GHz
–137 [dBm/Hz]
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier
turned off, and Frequency Band Mode: Normal
9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz
–120 [dBm/Hz]
100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz
–134 [dBm/Hz]
1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–153 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz
–150 [dBm/Hz]
2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–147 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤4 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤6 GHz
–144 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤13.5 GHz
–146 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤18.3 GHz
–145 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤26.5 GHz
–141 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–140 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤40 GHz
–135 [dBm/Hz]
–130 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤44.5 GHz
1-77
1
Overview
Display average noise level
Spectrum analyzer function
Specification
Chapter 1 Overview
Table 1.3.21-1 2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
Specification
Display average noise level
Spectrum analyzer function
(Cont’d)
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier
turned on, and Frequency Band Mode: Normal
100 kHz
–147 [dBm/Hz] Nominal
1 MHz
–156 [dBm/Hz]
30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz
–166 [dBm/Hz]
1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz
–164 [dBm/Hz]
2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz
–163 [dBm/Hz]
3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–163 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–163 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–160 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–159 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–156 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–149 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-067/167, without MS2840A-068/168, Microwave
Preselector Bypass turned on/off, and Frequency Band Mode: Normal
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–147 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–145 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–141 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–140 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–135 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–129 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier
turned off, Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on/off, and
Frequency Band Mode: Normal
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–142 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–140 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–136 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–135 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–131 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–125 [dBm/Hz]
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier
turned on, Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on, and Frequency
Band Mode: Normal
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–161 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–161 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–156 [dBm/Hz]
–152 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–151 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–143 [dBm/Hz]
1-78
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.21-1 2dB Step Attenuator for Millimeter-wave Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Specification
Display average noise level
Spectrum analyzer function
(Cont’d)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier
turned on, Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off, and Frequency
Band Mode: Normal
6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz
–164 [dBm/Hz]
13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz
–164 [dBm/Hz]
18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz
–159 [dBm/Hz]
26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz
–157 [dBm/Hz]
34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz
–155 [dBm/Hz]
40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz
–146 [dBm/Hz]
1-79
1
Overview
Item
Chapter 1 Overview
1.3.22 Noise Floor Reduction Option (MS2840A-051/151)
Table 1.3.22-1 Noise Floor Reduction Option Specifications
Item
Model, Name
Specification
Application
MS2840A-051
Noise Floor Reduction
MS2840A-151
Noise Floor Reduction Retrofit
When measuring signals using MS2840A Signal Analyzer either alone
or with the external mixer connected, MS2840A-051/151 allow
estimating the effects from noise floor of the devices and deducting the
estimated effects from the actually measured results.
Noise Floor Reduction
This function is usable only for Spectrum Analyzer.
Noise Floor Reduction is decided under the following conditions if not
otherwise specified.
18 to 28°C,Detector = Sample, RBW = 1 MHz,VBW = 1 Hz (Power
Average), Input attenuator = 0 dB, 50 Ω termination, Preselector
Manual Tune = 0 Hz and after Analyze Noise Floor is done:
This function measures the power per 1 Hz within each frequency band
by the following settings.
Center Frequency: (Center frequency of each frequency band
+  × 1000 000) Hz
Span:
Bandwidth of each frequency band /10
When MS2840A-040/041 is installed,
MS2840A-066 is installed and Low Phase Noise is On,
Center frequency = 2003.146093 MHz, Span = 1 MHz
Noise floor reduction = 11 dB Nominal
MS2840A-066 is not installed or Low Phase Noise = Off
Frequency Range
Noise Floor Reduction
9 kHz to 4000 MHz
11 dB Nominal
3500 to 4400 MHz
11 dB Nominal
4300 to 6100 MHz
11 dB Nominal
1-80
1.3
Specifications
Table 1.3.22-1 Noise Floor Reduction Option Specifications (Cont’d)
Item
Noise Floor Reduction
(Cont’d)
1
Specification
Overview
When MS2840A-044/046 is installed:
Without the external mixer
Frequency Range
Noise Floor Reduction
9 kHz to 4000 MHz
11 dB Nominal
3500 to 4400 MHz
11 dB Nominal
4300 to 6000 MHz
11 dB Nominal
3900 to 8000 MHz
7 dB Nominal
7900 to 10575 MHz
7 dB Nominal
10475 to 12200 MHz
7 dB Nominal
12100 to 18400 MHz
7 dB Nominal
18300 to 26600 MHz
7 dB Nominal
26500 to 42100 MHz
7 dB Nominal
42000 to 44500MHz
7 dB Nominal
With the external mixer
At Span:Bandwidth of each frequency band/100 after Analyze
External Mixer Noise Floor is done by the external mixer.
Noise Floor Reduction: 11 dB Nominal
Note that Noise Floor Reduction depends on the external mixer.
1-81
Chapter 1 Overview
1-82.
Chapter 2 Before Use
This chapter describes items that you should know before using the
MS2840A. Be sure to read this section at least once as it contains safety
tips and cautions for avoiding failure during use.
2.1
2.3
Before Use
2.2
2
Installation Location ...................................................... 2-2
2.1.1 Installation orientation....................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Distance from surrounding objects ................... 2-3
2.1.3 Installation location conditions.......................... 2-3
Items to Check Before Use ........................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Safety labels ..................................................... 2-4
2.2.2 Input level and reverse power (when vector
signal generator is installed) to RF Input .......... 2-5
2.2.3 Electrostatic ...................................................... 2-6
2.2.4 Notes on handling input connector and SG
output connector (when vector signal
generator is installed) ....................................... 2-8
2.2.5 USB memory .................................................... 2-8
Power Connection ........................................................ 2-9
2.3.1 Power requirements ......................................... 2-9
2.3.2 Connecting power cord .................................... 2-9
2-1
Chapter 2 Before Use
2.1 Installation Location
2.1.1
Installation orientation
Install the MS2840A horizontally or at an angle using the tilted legs as
shown in Figure 2.1.1-1. Do not place objects on top of the MS2840A
when tilted.
OK
NG
Figure 2.1.1-1 Installation orientation
CAUTION
If the MS2840A is not installed in a “OK” direction as
above, a small shock may turn it over and harm the user.
2-2
2.1
2.1.2
Installation Location
Distance from surrounding objects
A fan is installed to the MS2840A to prevent the internal temperature
from rising. Install the MS2840A in a location with the vents at least 10
cm away from walls, peripherals or other obstructions so as not to block
the fan perimeter.
Before Use
At least 10 cm space
At least
10 cm space
At least
10 cm space
At least 10 cm space
Figure 2.1.2-1 Distance from surrounding objects
2.1.3
Installation location conditions
Although the MS2840A operates at an ambient temperature of 0 to 50C,
avoid using it in locations, such as the following, since it may cause
failure.





2
Locations with strong vibrations
Humid and dusty locations
Locations with direct sunlight
Locations where there is the risk of exposure to active gases
Locations where power voltage severely fluctuates
2-3
Chapter 2 Before Use
2.2 Items to Check Before Use
2.2.1
Safety labels
To protect the safety of the user, the WARNING label shown in Figure
2.2.1-1 is affixed to the rear panel. Observe the instructions on the label.
WARNING
THIS MEASURING EQUIPMENT IS A
PRECISION ELECTRONIC DEVICE
THAT CONTAINS HAZARDOUS PARTS,
AND THEREFORE MUST NOT BE
SERVICED BY THE CUSTOMER.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES
DISASSEMBLE THIS EQUIPMENT.
THIS EQUIPMENT MUST BE SERVICED
ONLY BY QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
Figure 2.2.1-1 Warning labels
2-4
2.2
2.2.2
Items to Check Before Use
Input level and reverse power (when vector signal generator is
installed) to RF Input
For Option 044/046, without Option 008/108/068/168/069/169 installed,
or with Preamplifier turned off:
+30 dBm Max (Input attenuator ≥ 10 dB), ±0 Vdc Max
For Option 044/046, with Option 008/108/068/168/069/169 installed,
and with Preamplifier turned on:
+10 dBm Max (Input attenuator = 0 dB), ±0 Vdc Max
There is no reverse power protection for the SG output connector when
the Option 020/120/021/121 Vector Signal Generator Option is installed.
Be careful not to apply reverse power to the SG Output connector as
described below:
When Option 022/122 is NOT installed:
+12 dBm Max (<20 MHz), +24 dBm Max (≥20 MHz)
When Option 022/122 is installed:
+18 dBm Max (<20 MHz), +30 dBm Max (≥20 MHz)
In addition, do not apply DC voltage even when within the range
described above.
2-5
2
Before Use
The MS2840A is not provided with over-power protection. Be careful not
to apply the power to the RF Input connector as described below:
For Option 040/041, without Option 008/108 installed, or with
Preamplifier turned off:
+30 dBm Max (Input attenuator ≥10 dB), ±10 Vdc Max
For Option 040/041, with Option 008/108 installed, and with
Preamplifier turned on:
+10 dBm Max (Input attenuator = 0 dB), ±10 Vdc Max
Chapter 2 Before Use
2.2.3
Electrostatic
CAUTION
•
Always use the supplied 3-pin power cord to ground
both the MS2840A and DUT (included in test circuit).
After confirming that both the MS2840A and DUT are
grounded, use coaxial cables to connect them.
NEVER connect the MS2840A and DUT without
grounding, otherwise electrostatic discharge may
damage the MS2840A.
•
Do not touch the core conductor of the connector or
bring it into contact with metal. Doing so may damage
the input circuit of the MS2840A.
2-6
2.2
Items to Check Before Use
CAUTION
Do not touch the core conductor of the coaxial cable
connected to the input connector or bring it into contact
with metal.
2
Doing so may damage the input circuit of the MS2840A.
Before Use
2-7
Chapter 2 Before Use
CAUTION
Do not touch the core conductor to the metal when
connecting the coaxial cable to the connector.
Doing so may damage the input circuit of the MS2840A.
2.2.4
Notes on handling input connector and SG output connector
(when vector signal generator is installed)
For Option 040/041, only connect N-type connector to RF Input and SG
Output. For Option 044, only connect N-type connector to RF Input. For
Option 046, only connect K-type connector to RF Input. Connecting a
different connector will damage the connector.
2.2.5
2-8
USB memory stick
Note the orientation of the connection when using a USB memory stick.
Plugging in a USB memory stick in the wrong direction may damage the
connector.
2.3
Power Connection
2.3 Power Connection
This section describes the procedures for supplying power.
2.3.1
Power requirements
For normal operation of the MS2840A, observe the power voltage range
described below.
100 Vac system
200 Vac system
Voltage range
100 to 120 V
200 to 240 V
Frequency
Before Use
Power source
50 to 60 Hz
50 to 60 Hz
Changeover between 100 and 200 V system is made automatically.
The maximum power consumption of the MS2840A is 350 VA. Provide
sufficient power capacity.
CAUTION
Supplying power exceeding the above range may result in
electrical shock, fire, failure, or malfunction.
2.3.2
2
Connecting power cord
Insert the power plug into a grounded outlet, and connect the other end
to the power inlet on the rear panel. To ensure that the instrument is
properly grounded, always use the supplied 3-pin power cord.
2-9
Chapter 2 Before Use
WARNING
Always connect the instrument to a properly grounded
outlet. Do not use the instrument with an extension cord or
transformer that does not have a ground wire.
If the instrument is connected to an ungrounded outlet,
there is a risk of receiving a fatal electric shock. In
addition, the peripheral devices connected to the
instrument may be damaged.
Unless otherwise specified, the signal-connector ground
terminal, like an external conductor of the coaxial
connector, of the instrument is properly grounded when
connecting the power cord to a grounded outlet. Connect
the ground terminal of DUT to a ground having the same
potential before connecting with the instrument. Failure to
do so may result in an electric shock, fire, failure, or
malfunction.
CAUTION
If an emergency arises causing the instrument to fail or
malfunction, disconnect the instrument from the power
supply by disconnecting either end of the power cord.
When installing the instrument, place the instrument so
that an operator may easily connect or disconnect the
power cord from the power inlet and outlet. Moreover, DO
NOT fix the power cord around the plug and the power
inlet with a holding clamp or similar device.
If the instrument is mounted in a rack, a power switch for
the rack or a circuit breaker may be used for power
disconnection.
It should be noted that, the power switch on the front
panel of the instrument is a standby switch, and cannot be
used to cut the main power.
2-10.
Chapter 3 Common Operations
This chapter describes items to be understood before actually operating
the MS2840A, including part names, basic parameter setting methods,
modulation operation method and useful functions.
3.1
3.2
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3
Common Operations
3.3
3.4
Part Names ................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Part names ....................................................... 3-2
Turning Power On/Off ................................................. 3-12
3.2.1 Turning power On ........................................... 3-12
3.2.2 Turning power Off ........................................... 3-13
Auto Calibration .......................................................... 3-14
Settings on Configuration Screen ............................... 3-20
3.4.1 Display description ......................................... 3-21
3.4.2 Interface Settings............................................ 3-22
3.4.3 Copy Settings ................................................. 3-23
3.4.4 System Settings.............................................. 3-24
3.4.5 Application Switch Settings ............................ 3-27
3.4.6 System Information......................................... 3-28
3.4.7 Option Information .......................................... 3-29
3.4.8 File Operation ................................................. 3-29
3.4.9 Software Install/Uninstall ................................ 3-30
3.4.10 Correction ....................................................... 3-30
3.4.11 Display Annotation.......................................... 3-34
3.4.12 Calibration Alert .............................................. 3-34
Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications ........ 3-37
3.5.1 Loading applications ....................................... 3-38
3.5.2 Unloading applications ................................... 3-40
3.5.3 Switching applications .................................... 3-42
3.5.4 Changing application layout ........................... 3-43
Save and Recall Functions ......................................... 3-46
3.6.1 Saving parameters and waveform data.......... 3-46
3.6.2 Recalling parameters...................................... 3-48
3.6.3 Screen hard copy ........................................... 3-50
3.6.4 Simple Save&Recall ....................................... 3-51
Initializing .................................................................... 3-55
3.7.1 Preset ............................................................. 3-55
3.7.2 System Reset ................................................. 3-56
Installing and Uninstalling ........................................... 3-57
3.8.1 Installing software ........................................... 3-57
3.8.2 Uninstalling software ...................................... 3-61
3-1
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.1 Part Names
3.1.1
Part names
Front Panel
This section describes the keys and connectors located on the front panel.
10 14
21
12
9
8
7
6
5
4
13
15
11
17
20
18
22
3
1
2
19
16
Figure 3.1.1-1 Front Panel
1
Power Switch
Press to switch between the standby state in which AC power is supplied
and the Power On state in which the MS2840A is under operation. The
lights up orange in the standby state, and lights up green
Power lamp
in the Power On state. Press the power switch for a reasonably long
duration (for about two seconds).
2
SSD
SSD access lamp
Lights up when the MS2840A internal SSD is being accessed.
3
Copy key
Press to capture a screen image from the display and save it to a file.
4
Recall key
Press to recall a parameter file.
3-2
3.1
5
Part Names
Save key
Press to save a parameter file.
6
Cal key
Press to display the calibration execution menu.
7
Local key
Press to return to local operation from remote control operation through
GPIB, Ethernet or USB (B), and enable panel settings.
8
Remote lamp
9
Preset key
Resets parameters to their initial settings.
10
Function keys
Used for selecting or executing function menu displayed on the right of
the screen. The function menu contents are provided in multiple pages
and layers.
The number on the bottom of the screen indicates the menu page
number.
Next key
Press to go to the next page.
Back key
Press to go back to the previous layer within the function
menu.
Top key
Press to go back to the uppermost (top) layer.
3-3
Common Operations
Lights up when the MS2840A is in a remote control state.
3
Chapter 3 Common Operations
11
Main function keys 1
Used to set or execute main functions of the MS2840A.
Executable functions vary depending on the application currently
selected.
Press to set parameters related to frequency.
Press to set parameters related to level.
Press to set parameters related to frequency span.
Press to set parameters related to trigger.
Press to set parameters related to RBW/VBW.
Press to set parameters related to Time/Sweep.
12
Main function keys 2
Used to set or execute main functions of the MS2840A.
Executable functions vary depending on the application currently
selected.
Press to switch an application.
Press to display the Configuration screen.
Press to set parameters related to trace.
Press to set parameters related to the measurement function.
Press to set parameters related to the marker function.
Press to set parameters related to the peak search function.
Press to start a single measurement.
Press to start continuous measurements.
3-4
3.1
13
Part Names
Rotary knob/Cursor keys/Enter key/Cancel key
The rotary knob and cursor keys are used to select display items or
change settings.
Pressing
fixes the entered or selected data.
Pressing
cancels the entered or selected data.
3
Shift key
Used to operate any keys with functions described in blue characters on
the panel. First press the Shift key, then press the target key when the
Shift key lamp lights up green.
15
Numeric keypad
Used to enter numbers on parameter setup screens.
Pressing
deletes the last entered digit or character.
Hexadecimal values [A] to [F] can be entered by pressing
when the Shift key lamp
16
to
lights up green.
RF Input connector
Inputs an RF signal.
When Option 040/041/044 is installed: Type N connector
When Option 046 is installed: Type K connector
3-5
Common Operations
14
Chapter 3 Common Operations
17
RF output control key
enables
If the Vector Signal Generator option is installed, pressing
(On) or disables (Off) the RF signal output. The lamp of the RF output
control key lights up orange when the RF signal output is set to On.
This is not available when the Option 044/046 is installed.
18
RF output connector
Outputs an RF signal, when the vector signal generator option is
installed.
This is not available when the Option 044/046 is installed.
19
USB connector (type A)
Used to connect a USB keyboard or mouse or the USB memory stick
supplied with the MS2840A.
20
Modulation control key
When the vector signal generator option is installed, RF signal
modulation can be turned on and off by pressing
.
When modulation is on, the key lamp lights up green.
This is not available when the Option 044/046 is installed.
21
Application key
Press to switch between applications.
SPA key
Press to display the Spectrum Analyzer main screen.
SA key
Press to display the Signal Analyzer main screen, when
Option 005/105/006/106/009/109/077/177/078/178 is
installed.
SG key
Press to display the Signal Analyzer main screen, when
Vector Signal Generator option is installed.
Blank key
Not used.
Appli key
When Auto is specified, the application selected by using
the Application Switch is displayed. When Manual is
specified, the pre-specified Application is displayed.
Refer to 3.5.4 “Changing application layout”.
3-6
3.1
22
Part Names
1st Local Output connector
This is available when the Option 044/046 is installed.
Supplies local signal and bias current to the external mixer, and receives
the IF signal with its frequency converted.
3
Common Operations
3-7
Chapter 3 Common Operations
Rear panel
This section describes the connectors located on the rear panel.
12
18
17
1
2
13 4
14 7 16 6
15 10 8
9
11
Figure 3.1.1-2 Rear panel
1
Ref Input connector (reference frequency signal input connector)
Inputs an external reference frequency signal (5 MHz/10 MHz/13 MHz).
It is used for inputting reference frequency signals with accuracy higher
than that of those inside the MS2840A, or for synchronizing the
frequency of the MS2840A to that of other device.
2
Buffer Out connector (reference frequency signal output connector)
Outputs the reference frequency signal (10 MHz) generated inside the
MS2840A. It is used for synchronizing the frequencies between other
devices and the MS2840A based on the reference frequency signal output
from this connector.
4
Sweep Status Out connector
Outputs a signal that is enabled when an internal measurement is
performed or measurement data is obtained.
3-8
3.1
6
Part Names
AUX connector
This is a complex connector for inputting a baseband clock reference
signal of the Vector Signal Generator (optional), and BER Measurement
function (optional). See Table 3.1.1-1 for the internal pin assignment of
the AUX connector.
Table 3.1.1-1 Pin assignment of AUX connector
Function
Pin Number
BER
BER_CLK
GND
BER_EN
GND
BER_DATA
GND
MARKER1
GND
MARKER2
GND
MARKER3
GND
PULS_MOD
GND
BB_REF_CLK
GND
3
Common Operations
SG
24
25
48
45
49
50
13
11
38
36
39
16
42
41
22
20
Signal Name
Do not connect anything to connectors not listed in Table 3.1.1-1, because
they are interface connectors provided for device maintenance.
7
GPIB connector
Used when controlling the MS2840A externally via GPIB.
8
USB connector (type B)
Used when controlling the MS2840A externally via USB.
9
Ethernet connector
Used for connecting to a personal computer (PC) or for Ethernet
connection.
3-9
Chapter 3 Common Operations
10
USB connectors (type A)
Used to connect a USB keyboard or mouse or the USB memory stick
supplied with the MS2840A.
11
Monitor Out connector
Used for connection with an external display.
12
AC inlet
Used for supplying power.
13
SA Trigger Input connector
This is a BNC connector used to input the external trigger signal (TTL)
for the SPA or SA application.
14
SG Trigger Input connector
This is a BNC connector used to input the external trigger signal (TTL)
for the vector signal generator option.
15 Primary HDD/SSD
Primary HDD/SSD slot
This is a SSD slot.
16 Secondary HDD/SSD
Secondary HDD/SSD slot
This is a SSD slot for the options.
3-10
3.1
17
Part Names
IF output connector
Monitor output of the internal IF signal.
This is available when the Option 044/046 is installed.
18
Noise Source connector
Supply (+28V) of the Noise Source Drive.
This is available when the Option 017/117 is installed.
3
Common Operations
3-11
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.2 Turning Power On/Off
3.2.1
Turning power On
The following shows the procedure for turning the power On.
<Procedure>
1.
Plug in the power cord jack side to the AC power inlet on the rear
panel. Make sure it is plugged all the way in at this time.
2.
Plug the power cord plug side to the AC power outlet. The MS2840A
lamp lights up orange.
enters standby state and the power switch
3.
Press the power switch. The
begins.
lamp lights up green and startup
Turning the power On starts Windows then the MS2840A software. The
following startup screen is displayed during startup. Do not press the
power switch while the startup screen is displayed. The software may not
startup normally when the power switch is pressed.
Figure 3.2.1-1 Example of Startup Screen
3-12
3.2
3.2.2
Turning Power On/Off
Turning power Off
The following shows the procedure for turning the power Off.
When turning power Off using panel keys
<Procedure>
1.
Press the power switch to close applications and start shutdown.
lamp lights up
The green power switch power lamp lights off, the
orange, and the power is turned Off. The main power is On at this
time.
Note:
When turning power Off using mouse connected to MS2840A
<Procedure>
1.
Connect the supplied mouse to the MS2840A and open the Start
Menu from the Windows Taskbar.
2.
Select “Shut down”
3.
Shutdown begins, the green power switch power lamp lights off, the
lamp lights up orange, and the power is turned Off. The main
power is On at this time.
Forced shutdown
<Procedure>
1.
Press the power switch for four seconds or more. The green power
lamp lights up orange, and the
switch power lamp lights off, the
power is turned Off.
Notes:
• Use forced shutdown as an emergency operation only when key,
mouse, or keyboard operations are disabled. A failure may have
occurred in the event the power cannot be turned Off even after
pressing the power switch for 4 or more seconds. Unplug the
power cord from the outlet and contact an Anritsu Service and
Sales office or agent.
• Unplugging the power plug while accessing the SSD may result
in SSD failures. Unplug the power plug when the power is
turned Off.
3-13
Common Operations
Do not press the power switch for more than 4 seconds. Doing so
will forcibly shut down the system during software closing
processing.
3
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.3 Auto Calibration
An auto calibration function that uses an internal calibrating oscillator is
provided to minimize measurement errors of the MS2840A.
CAUTION
Do not input signals to RF input when calibrating. Correct
calibration values cannot be obtained when the auto
calibrating function is executed while signals are being
input.
Press
(Cal) to display the Cal function menu.
Figure 3.3-1 Cal key
3-14
3.3
Auto Calibration
Table 3.3-1 Cal function menu
Function
Key
Page 1
Menu Display
Application Cal
F1
SIGANA All
F2
F3
Level Cal
Band Cal
Local Leak
Suppression
F4
Extra Band Cal
F7
Extra Band Cal Clear
F8
Close
Page 2
F5
F6
F7
F8
Application Cal
Analyze Noise Floor
Clear
Analyze Noise Floor
Analyze External
Mixer Noise Floor
Close
Press
(Cal) to display
Executes all calibrations (Level Cal, Band Cal,
Local Leak Suppression, Extra Band Cal)
except Extra Band Cal.
Executes level calibration.
Executes analysis band calibration.
Executes local leak suppression.
Executes band calibration within the current
frequency.
Clears the calibration values obtained by
Extra Band Cal to zero.
Returns to the application screen.
Press
(Cal), then press
(more) to
display.
Clears the calibration values obtained by
Analyze Noise Floor and Analyze External
Mixer Noise Floor to zero.
Measures noise floor calibration values..
Measures noise floor calibration values when
using the external mixer
Returns to the application screen.
Note:
Analyze Noise Floor Clear, Analyze Noise Floor, and Analyze
External Mixer Noise Floor are displayed only when
MS2840A-051/151 is installed.
3-15
3
Common Operations
F6
Function
Chapter 3 Common Operations
The auto calibration function includes the following four functions and a
function to execute (1) to (3) functions in a batch.
(1) Level calibration (Level Cal)
Calibrates reference level errors, RBW switching errors and input
attenuator switching errors to minimize level measurement errors.
Example: Executing signal level calibration
<Procedure>
1.
Press
2.
Select
(Cal).
(Level Cal).
(2) Analysis band calibration (Band Cal)
Calibrates the frequency flatness and phase characteristics within the
analyzed band.
Example: Executing analysis band calibration
<Procedure>
1.
Press
2.
Select
(Cal).
(Band Cal).
(3) Local Leak Suppression
Executes calibration to suppress local leaks affecting low frequency and
low level measurements.
Example: Suppressing local leaks using local leak suppression function
<Procedure>
1.
Press
2.
Select
(Cal).
(Local Leak Suppression).
The following are the steps to batch execute all calibration functions.
<Procedure>
3-16
1.
Press
2.
Select
(Cal).
(SIGANA All).
3.3
(4)
Auto Calibration
Extra Band Cal
Executes band calibration within the current frequency.
Example: Executes band calibration within the current frequency.
<Procedure>
1.
Press
2.
Select
(Cal).
(Extra Band Cal).
The calibration value is applied if both of the following conditions are
met:
This function cannot be executed when Spectrum Analyzer is selected.
To activate Extra Band Cal, select any function other than Spectrum
Analyzer, Signal Generator, BER Measurement, and Power Meter when
Spectrum Analyzer is selected.
Extra Band Cal calibration values cannot be applied when Low Phase
Noise is enabled. For Low Phase Noise, refer to 3.4.4 “System Settings”.
Depending on the version of the software you install, the existing Extra
Band Cal calibration values might be cleared when installing the
software. When the software is installed successfully, execute Extra Band
Cal to obtain calibration values again. For how to install the software,
refer to 3.8.1 “Installing software”.
(5)
Extra Band Cal Clear
Clears the calibration values obtained by Extra Band Cal.
Example: Clearing the calibration values obtained by Extra Band Cal.
<Procedure>
1.
Press
2.
Select
(Cal)
(Extra Band Cal).
3-17
Common Operations
• The difference between “the center frequency at the time of executing
Extra Band Cal” and “the set value for the current center frequency” is
100 kHz or less.
• Both of the center frequencies are on the same frequency band.
3
Chapter 3 Common Operations
(6)
Analyze Noise Floor Clear
Clears the noise floor calibration values obtained by Analyze Noise Floor
and Analyze External Mixer Noise Floor to zero.
Example: Clearing the noise floor calibration values obtained by Analyze
Noise Floor.
<Procedure>
1.
Press
(Cal).
2.
Press
(more).
3
Select
(Analyze Noise Floor Clear).
This function is available only when MS2840A-051/151 is installed.
(7)
Analyze Noise Floor
Measures noise floor calibration values
Note:
It takes 20 to 30 minutes to acquire the noise floor calibration
values. Do not power off or operate MS2840A when acquiring the
calibration values.
Example: Obtaining noise floor calibration values to deduct from the
measured results.
<Procedure>
1.
Press
(Cal).
2.
Press
(more).
3
Select
(Analyze Noise Floor).
This function is available only when MS2840A-051/151 is installed.
Estimates internal noise floor from the measured results using the
calibration values obtained by Analyze Noise Floor in addition to the
noise floor calibration values that are stored inside MS2840A at
shipment. Then deducts the estimation from the measured results.
Terminate RF Input when obtaining the noise floor calibration values by
Analyze Noise Floor.
Depending on the version of the software you install, the existing
Analyze Noise Floor calibration values might be cleared when installing
the software. When the software is installed successfully, execute
Analyze Noise Floor to obtain calibration values again. For how to install
the software, refer to 3.8.1 “Installing software”.
3-18
3.3
(8)
Auto Calibration
Analyze External Mixer Noise Floor
Measures noise floor calibration values when using the external mixer
Note:
It takes 20 to 30 minutes to acquire the noise floor calibration
values. Do not power off or operate MS2840A when acquiring the
calibration values.
Example: Obtaining noise floor calibration values to deduct from the
measured results when using the external mixer.
<Procedure>
Press
2.
Press
(more).
3
Select
(Analyze External Mixer Noise Floor).
3
(Cal).
This function is available only when MS2840A-051/151 is installed.
The attempt of executing Analyze External Mixer Noise Floor fails when
the external mixer is Off.
Terminate the input port of the external mixer when obtaining the noise
floor calibration values by Analyze External Mixer Noise Floor.
Depending on the version of the software you install, the existing
Analyze External Mixer Noise Floor calibration values might be cleared
when installing the software. When the software is installed successfully,
execute Analyze External Mixer Noise Floor to obtain calibration values
again. For how to install the software, refer to 3.8.1 “Installing software”.
3-19
Common Operations
1.
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.4 Settings on Configuration Screen
MS2840A system settings, and settings for system information display
and common application functions can be configured in the Configuration
screen.
Press
to display the Configuration screen.
Figure 3.4-1 Configuration screen
3-20
3.4
3.4.1
Settings on Configuration Screen
Display description
The function menu in the Configuration screen consists of two pages,
.
which can be toggled by pressing
Table 3.4.1-1 Configuration function menu
Function
Key
Page 1
Menu Display
Configuration
Interface Settings
F2
Copy Settings
F3
System Settings
F4
Application Switch
Settings
F5
System Information
F6
Option Information
F7
File Operation
F8
Page 2
Close
Configuration
F1
Software Install
F3
Calibration Alert
F4
Display Annotation
F6
Save&Recall Settings
F7
Correction
F8
Close
Press
to display.
Sets interface used for remote control.
Mainframe Remote Control
1.3 “Interface Settings”
3.4.2 “Interface Settings”
Sets screen hard copy.
3.4.3 “Copy Settings”
Turns on and off the buzzer sound and sets the
reference frequency signal .
3.4.4 “System Settings”
Sets loading/unloading of applications.
3.4.5 “Application Switch Settings”
Displays MS2840A system information.
3.4.6 “System Information”
Displays options installed in the MS2840A.
3.4.7 “Option Information”
Sets file and data management.
3.4.8 “File Operation”
Closes Configuration screen.
Press
, then press
to display.
Sets software and license installation.
3.4.9 “Software Install/Uninstall”
Sets the calibration alert functions.
3.4.12 “Calibration Alert”
Turns on and off frequency and level display on
the application screen.
On: Display (default), Off: Hide
3.4.11 “Display Annotation”
Sets the mode for save and recall function.
3.6.4 “Simple Save&Recall”
Sets settings related to Correction.
3.4.10 “Correction”
Closes Configuration screen.
3-21
3
Common Operations
F1
Function
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.4.2
Interface Settings
Pressing
(Interface Settings) after
displays the Interface
Settings screen. GPIB, Ethernet and USB interface conditions used for
remote control can be set in this screen. Select the item to be set with the
(Set) to reflect the settings of that item.
cursor, and then press
Refer to Section 1.3 “Interface Settings” in the
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer
Operation Manual (Mainframe Remote Control) for details.
Figure 3.4.2-1 Interface Settings screen
3-22
3.4
3.4.3
Settings on Configuration Screen
Copy Settings
Pressing
(Copy Settings) after
displays the Copy Settings
screen. Screen hard copy conditions can be set in this screen. Select the
(Set) to reflect the
item to be set with the cursor, and then press
settings of that item.
3
Common Operations
Figure 3.4.3-1 Copy Settings screen
Table 3.4.3-1 Copy Settings items
No.
Item
<1> File Type Settings
<2> Color Settings
<3> File Name Settings
<4> Storage Place Settings
Description
Selects the file format. BMP or PNG can be
set.
Sets the screen hard copy color. Normal
(same as screen display) or Reverse can be
selected.
The file naming method can be selected from
auto (date + sequence number) or random.
This setting is applied also to determining
name for parameters and waveform data
saving file.
3.6.1 “Saving parameters and waveform
data”
The file save location can be selected
3-23
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.4.4
System Settings
Pressing
(System Settings) after
displays the System Settings
(Set)
screen. Select the item to be set with the cursor, and then press
to reflect the settings of that item.
Figure 3.4.4-1 System Settings screen
Table 3.4.4-1 System Settings items
Item
Beep Sound Setting
Reference Signal
3-24
Description
Sets the warning sound On/Off.
Selects the reference frequency signal type.
Auto
Detects and automatically selects external
reference signal input. Synchronizes the
internal reference oscillator when an external
input is not detected, and synchronizes to the
external reference signal when an external
input is detected.
Fixed to Internal
Uses the internal reference oscillator.
3.4
Settings on Configuration Screen
Table 3.4.4-1 System Settings items (Cont’d)
Item
External Reference
Frequency
Description
Selects signal frequency, when using external
reference signal as the signal source for
reference frequency.
Switches between Electronic attenuator
(E-ATT) and Mechanical attenuator (M-ATT).
*1
Electronic Atten Combined :
Mostly uses E-ATT with partial use
of M-ATT.
Attenuator Mode*1
Note:
When inputting a signal of –10 dBm or
higher into the RF input port in the
frequency of 10 MHz or lower
(undefined in the E-ATT Combined
standards), the signal may be distorted.
When executing measurement in the
frequency of 10 MHz or lower, use of
“Mechanical Atten Only” is
recommended.
Low Phase Noise*2
Sets Low Phase Noise option On/Off
(enable/disable).
The setting range is displayed at the right
side of the frame.
*1: The switching is made according to the table shown below.
*2: This is displayed when the MS2840A-066/166 Low Phase Noise
Performance Option is installed.
Figure 3.4.4-1 is an example for other than MS2840A-040. For
MS2840A-040, the setting range display is only for SPAN ≤1 MHz
(SPA).
3-25
Common Operations
Mechanical Atten Only :
Exclusively uses M-ATT.
3
Chapter 3 Common Operations
Table 3.4.4-2 Attenuator Mode switching
Option
040
041
044
046
1
Frequency *
≤ 6 GHz
> 6 GHz
≤ 6 GHz*2
> 6 GHz*3
3-26
Electronic Atten
Combined
0 to 10 dB → M-ATT
12 to 40 dB → E-ATT
42 to 60 dB → M-ATT
All M-ATT
0, 10 dB → M-ATT
12 to 40 dB → E-ATT
50, 60 dB → M-ATT
All M-ATT
Mechanical
Atten Only
All M-ATT
All M-ATT
All M-ATT
All M-ATT
*1:
The following reference frequency is used:
Spectrum analyzer mode: STOP frequency
Signal analyzer mode: Center frequency
*2:
Spurious Mode:
Stop frequency ≤ 4.1 GHz and Start frequency < 4 GHz
*3:
Spurious Mode:
Stop frequency > 4.1 GHz or Start frequency ≥ 4 GHz
3.4
3.4.5
Settings on Configuration Screen
Application Switch Settings
Pressing
(Application Switch Settings) after
displays the
Application Switch Settings function menu. The loading/unloading of
applications can be set from this menu. Select the item to be set with the
(Set) to display the setting window of that
cursor, and then press
item or start performing the setting.
Table 3.4.5-1 Application Switch Settings function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F2
Unload Application
Select
F3
Position Change
F7
Set
F8
Close
Selects an application located in the Unloaded
Applications frame to startup the selected
application.
3.5.1 "Loading applications"
Selects an application located in the Loaded
Applications frame to end the selected
application.
3.5.2 "Unloading applications"
Sets the loaded application anywhere on the
Application Switch menu.
3.5.4 "Changing application layout"
Displays the setting window for the items
selected by pressing F1, F2, or F3, or starts
performing the setting.
Returns to the Configuration screen.
3-27
Common Operations
F1
Load Application
Select
3
Function
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.4.6
System Information
Pressing
(System Information) after
displays the System
Information function menu. The MS2840A system information can be
viewed from this menu. Pressing the function key corresponding to the
system information to be viewed displays the window of the selected
item.
Table 3.4.6-1 System Information function menu
Function
Key
Page 1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
Page 2
F1
F7
3-28
Menu Display
Function
Press
and then press
(System
Information) to display.
Displays the MS2840A product type, serial
number, operating time, and attenuator
switching counts.
ATT_2DB (With MS2840A-046 and without
MS2840A-019/119: No display)
ATT_4DB (With MS2840A-046: No display)
ATT_4aDB (With MS2840A-046 and
System Information
MS2840A-019/119: Display)
View
ATT_4bDB (With MS2840A-046 and
MS2840A-019/119: Display)
ATT_8DB (With MS2840A-046: No display)
ATT_10DB
ATT_16DB (With MS2840A-046: No display)
ATT_20DB
ATT_30DB (With MS2840A-046: Display)
Software Version Vi Displays the version of the software installed in
ew
the MS2840A.
Displays the FPGA version for each board
FPGA Version View
installed in the MS2840A.
Displays the revisions of each board installed in
Board Revision View
the MS2840A. (Some boards are not displayed.)
Software License Vie Displays the license of software installed in the
w
MS2840A.
Displays the license of SG waveforms installed
SG Wave License
in the MS2840A (only when a vector signal
View
generator is installed).
Press
, and then press
(System
System Information
Information) to display.
System Reset
Initializes the system.
Information Save
Saves the MS2840A system information.
System Information
3.4
3.4.7
Settings on Configuration Screen
Option Information
Pressing
(Option Information) after
displays the option screen.
Information on options installed in the MS2840A can be viewed in this
screen.
3.4.8
File Operation
Pressing
(File Operation) after
displays the File Operation
function menu. Data files can be managed from this menu. Pressing the
function key corresponding to the data file to be managed displays the
setting window of that item.
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Device
(D:)
F2
Parameter Save Data
F3
F4
F5
F7
Copy Data
Trace Data
Digitizer Data
System Information
Function
Selects drive.
Manages save data for parameter settings
file.
Manages copied file data.
Manages trace data.
Manages digitized data.
Manages system information.
3-29
Common Operations
Table 3.4.8-1 File Operation function menu
3
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.4.9
Software Install/Uninstall
Press
, and then press
to move to page 2 of the Configuration
(Software Install) to display the Software
function menu. Press
Install menu. Software can be installed and uninstalled to/from the
MS2840A from this menu. Pressing the function key corresponding to the
item to be set executes the selected item.
Refer to Section 3.8 “Installing and Uninstalling” for details.
3.4.10 Correction
When making measurements with a spectrum analyzer, it may be
necessary to correct the error and gain of the measurement system. The
following are examples of them:
Frequency characteristics and loss of measurement cables
Frequency characteristics and loss of pre-amplifier, etc. connected to RF
input connector.
When wanting to measure the field strength with an antenna or
near-field probe connected (antenna factor correction).
In the cases above, Correction functions allow you to correct the error
and gain.
You can input correction value via csv file or remote control operation. If
inputting via csv file, refer to the Recall Correction Table. For details of
remote command input, see “Correction Make Up” in Chapter 4 of the
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer
Operation Manual Mainframe Remote Control.
3-30
3.4
Settings on Configuration Screen
Correction
Press
, and then press
to move to page 2 of the Configuration
(Correction) to display the Correction function
function menu. Press
menu. Those functions are used to set correction factors for frequency
characteristics.
Table 3.4.10-1 Correction function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
Correction (On/Off)
F2
Save Correction Table
F3
Recall Correction Table
F8
Close
Sets Correction to On/Off.
When set to On, the level correction
processing function is executed.
Opens the Save Correction Table function
menu.
Opens the Recall Correction Table function
menu.
Returns to the Configuration menu.
Save Correction Table
Pressing
(Save Correction Table) on Correction function menu
displays Save Correction Table function menu. Those functions are used
to save level frequency characteristics.
Table 3.4.10-2 Save Correction Table function menu
Function
Key
F1
Menu Display
Device
(D:)
F7
Save Correction Table
F8
Close
Function
Selects the drive.
Saves the level frequency characteristics.
When File Name Setting is set to Data +
sequential, the file is automatically
named ”Corr date_sequential number”. The
file is in CSV format and is saved in
“[Selected drive]:\Anritsu
Corporation\Signal Analyzer\User
Data\Corrections\”. Up to 1000 files can be
saved in the folder.
Returns to the Configuration menu.
3-31
3
Common Operations
F1
Function
Chapter 3 Common Operations
Recall Correction Table
Pressing
(Recall Correction Table) on Correction function menu
displays the Recall Correction Table function menu. Those functions are
used to recall the saved level frequency characteristics.
Table 3.4.10-3 Recall Correction Table function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Device
(D:)
F7
Recall Correction
Table
F8
Close
Function
Selects the drive.
Recalls the level frequency characteristics.
A file is in CSV format.
Returns to the Configuration menu.
A Correction file is in CSV format, as shown below. Signal levels can be
corrected by sets of frequency and level in the Correction file. Also, the
correction factors between Fa and Fb are calculated by the linear
interpolation of log value at Fa and Fb.
Frequency(Hz),Level(dB)
0,0
980000000,1
1000000000,4
1200000000,1
Describe the frequency and level to be corrected within the following
range for the CSV file.
Up to 4096 items of correction data can be set.
[Frequency]
Range
Resolution
Set the unit in Hz.
[Level]
Range
Resolution
3-32
–1 to 400 GHz
1 Hz
–100 to 100 dB
0.001 dB
3.4
Settings on Configuration Screen
Operation when correction factors are entered
As shown in Figure 3.4.10-4, if the frequency range over which the
correction factors are entered is from Fa to Fb, displayed frequency
ranges lower than Fa or higher than Fb have correction factors applied.
The correction factor for frequencies lower than Fa is the same as that
(La) for Fa and the correction factor for frequencies higher than Fb is the
same as that (Lb) for Fb. The correction factors between Fa and Fb are
calculated by the linear interpolation of log value at Fa and Fb.
3
Level (dBm)
Common Operations
Lb
La
Fa
Fb Frequency
(Hz)
Correction Factor Input
Range
Figure 3.4.10-4 Operation When Correction Factors Are Entered
Correction factors apply to all the applications other than Signal
Generator.
In Signal Analyzer functions, the correction factors of the center
frequency are applied to all the trace data in the same span.
Executing the following functions initializes the correction factors.
Installing application software does not initialize the correction factors.
To execute System Reset.
To execute the system recovery functions.
3-33
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.4.11 Display Annotation
When Display Annotation is OFF, the measurement target’s frequency
and level included in the frequency-related settings, level-related
settings, marker values, and measurement results are hidden from the
application screen to avoid being seen.
and then press
. Switch On/Off the display by pressing
Press
(Display Annotation) on Page 2 of the Configuration function menu.
On
Off
Displays frequency and signal level. (Default)
Hides frequency and signal level.
Note:
When Display Annotation is Off, only applications that support
Display Annotation function are displayed in the Application Switch
menu.
3.4.12 Calibration Alert
Calibration Alert displays an alert when the temperature change or the
elapsed time based on the last automatic calibration (SIGANA All) meets
the trigger conditions. The trigger conditions for alerts, or temperature
thresholds and elapsed time, can be specified.
and then press
. Pressing
(Calibration Alert) on
Press
Page 2 of the Configuration function menu displays the Calibration Alert
function menu.
3-34
3.4
Settings on Configuration Screen
Table 3.4.12-1 Calibration Alert function menu
Function
Key
Item
Alert Mode
F2
Temperature
F3
Elapsed Time
Specifies the trigger conditions for alerts.
None
No alert occurs.
Temperature
An alert occurs when a temperature goes
outsides the specified thresholds based on the
internal temperature measured at the last
automatic calibration (SIGANA All).
Elapsed Time
An alert occurs when the time passes longer
than the specified Elapsed Time since the last
automatic calibration time (SIGANA All)
Both
An alert occurs when either of temperature
change or elapsed time meets the trigger
conditions.
Specifies the temperature thresholds for alerts.
Range
0.5 to 50.0°C
Resolution 0.5°C
Default
2.0°C
Specifies the elapsed time for alerts.
Range
1 to 200 h (hours)
Resolution 1 h (hour)
Default
1 h (hour)
3-35
3
Common Operations
F1
Description
Chapter 3 Common Operations
When the specified trigger conditions are met, an alert appears at upper
part of the screen as Figure 3.4.12-1. An alert is released by executing
automatic calibration (SIGANA All).
Figure 3.4.12-1 Alert Display
When Alert Mode is Both or Temperature, the alert remains displayed
even after the internal temperature goes back to within the specified
thresholds. The alert is released by executing automatic calibration
(SIGANA All).
Notes:
• Even when the trigger conditions are met, no alert appears for
the first 30 minutes after turning On the MS2840A, because it
is the warm-up time.
• This function uses Windows date/time to monitor the elapsed
time from the last automatic calibration (SIGANA All). An alert
is not displayed at correct elapsed time when the Windows
date/time is changed. Execute automatic calibration (SIGANA
All) again if it is changed.
• For details of remote control commands to query status, refer to
“Status of Calibration Alert” in Section 4.1 “Application
Common Device Messages” in the
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A Signal
Analyzer Operation Manual (Mainframe Remote Control).
3-36
3.5
Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications
3.5 Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications
The following describes the procedures for loading, unloading and
switching applications (signal analyzer, spectrum analyzer, etc.).
Loading applications refers to the setting of applications already
installed to an execution state. Loaded applications are registered to the
Application Switch menu and are in an operable state. In addition, these
applications enter an execution state when the power is turned on after
registration. At the factor default, all applications are installed thus in
“loaded” state. However, application in excess of maximum number of
loadable applications is listed as “Unloaded”.
Switching applications refers to the operation for selecting the
applications to be operated from the applications in an execution state.
You can select the target applications from the Application Switch menu.
CAUTION
•
Applications registered to the Application Switch menu
automatically enter an execution state when starting up
the MS2840A. The more registered applications, the
longer startup will take.
•
In the event running applications are suddenly ended
while operating Windows, press
, turn the MS2840A
power Off or shutdown Windows, and then turn the
MS2840A power On again.
•
When many applications are running simultaneously
and the measurement software calls a measurement
function from the signal or spectrum analyzer functions,
sometimes the application may take a long time to
switch. Reducing the number of simultaneously
running applications by unloading them will help
prevent this problem.
3-37
Common Operations
Unloading applications refers to the halting and ending of applications in
an execution state. Unloaded applications are released from Application
Switch menu registration and will not run until they are re-loaded.
3
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.5.1
Loading applications
Applications can be loaded from the Configuration screen.
<Procedure>
1.
After pressing
, press
(Application Switch Settings) to
display the Application Switch Registration screen.
2.
(Load Application Select), select the applications to be
Press
loaded from the applications displayed in “Unloaded Applications” at
(Set).
the bottom part of the screen, and then press
(Load Application Select) once again, when an error
Press
message “Loading application failed” is displayed.
Figure 3.5.1-1 Application Switch Registration screen
3-38
3.5
3.
Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications
When registered correctly, the selected applications will be displayed
in “Loaded Applications” at the top part of the screen.
3
Common Operations
Figure 3.5.1-2 Application Switch Registration screen
4.
to display the Application Switch menu. Check that the
Press
loaded application is displayed in the menu. Select the application
with the function key to operate the application.
Figure 3.5.1-3 Application Switch Menu screen
3-39
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.5.2
Unloading applications
Applications can be unloaded from the Configuration screen.
<Procedure>
1.
After pressing
, press
(Application Switch Settings) to
display the Application Switch Registration screen.
2.
Press
(Unload Application Select), select the application to be
unloaded from the applications displayed in “Loaded Applications” at
(Set).
the top part of the screen with the cursor, and then press
Figure 3.5.2-1 Application Switch Registration screen
3-40
3.5
3.
Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications
When ended correctly, the selected applications will be displayed in
“Unloaded Applications” at the bottom part of the screen.
3
Common Operations
Figure 3.5.2-2 Application Switch Settings screen
3-41
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.5.3
Switching applications
Applications to be operated can be switched in the Application Switch
menu.
displays the Application Switch menu screen. Pressing
Pressing
the function key corresponding to the application switches to the selected
application screen.
If the Application (Auto/Manual) setting is set to Auto as explained in
“3.5.4 Changing application layout”, the application you selected above
is assigned. From the next time on, you can call up the application by
.
only pressing
Note:
When Display Annotation is Off, only applications that support
Display Annotation function are displayed in the Application Switch
menu.
Figure 3.5.3-1 Application Switch menu
3-42
3.5
3.5.4
Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications
Changing application layout
The layout of applications can be changed as desired in the Application
Switch menu. Set the application layout in the Configuration screen.
<Procedure>
1.
After pressing
, press
(Application Switch Settings) to
display the Application Switch Registration screen.
2.
(Position Change) to display the Application Switch
Press
Function Position Edit screen. The Setting function menu is also
displayed.
The arrangement in the Function Position area is the arrangement
of the function keys displayed according to the Application Switch
key.
The arrangement in the Application Key area is the same as the
Application Key arrangement.
Table 3.5.4-1 Setting function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Application
(Auto/Manual)
F7
F8
Set
Cancel
Function
Auto:
The setting of Application Key slot 5 is
performed automatically, and an application is
assigned to the Appli key automatically.
3.5.3 “Switching applications”
Manual:
The setting of Application Key slot 5 is
performed manually, and the assignment of an
application to the Appli key is fixed.
Finalizes the assignment of applications.
Returns to the Configuration screen.
3-43
Common Operations
Note:
3
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.
In the Function Position field, select the application whose layout is
.
to be changed with the cursor, and then press
Figure 3.5.4-1 Application Switch Function Position Edit screen
4.
Select the new position from the slots in the Function Position area
or slot 5 in the Application Key area using the cursor keys and press
.
Note:
Slots 1, 2, and 3 in the Application Key area are automatically
assigned to the Spectrum Analyzer, and Signal Analyzer, and
Signal Generator applications in accordance with the application
key display on the front panel. Slot 4 is not used.
Any application can be set for slot 5 and assigned to the Appli key.
3-44
3.5
5.
Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications
After checking that the application is placed in the selected position,
(Set).
press
3
3-45
Common Operations
Figure 3.5.4-2 Application Switch Function Position Edit screen
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.6 Save and Recall Functions
This section describes the conditions for setting parameters to the
internal SSD and USB memory stick (Parameter) and saving (Save) and
recalling (Recall) of waveform data (Trace).
Note:
Use the USB memory stick supplied with the MS2840A. Using
other USB memory stick may cause malfunction due to device
incompatibility.
3.6.1
Saving parameters and waveform data
With the MS2840A, the current setting conditions and waveform data
can be saved to the internal SSD or a USB memory stick.
Saving parameter settings
<Procedure>
1.
Press
from the Configuration screen, Signal Analyzer screen, or
Spectrum Analyzer screen to display the Save function menu shown
in Table 3.6.1-1.
2.
(Device) to change the save destination. When the Setting
Press
window is displayed, select the drive to be saved and then press
(Set) to set.
3.
(Save
When the save destination has been determined, press
Application). The save target will be all parameter setting conditions
(Parameter) of the launched applications.
The parameter saving file will be output with the name “Param_date_
sequential number.xml.” If a parameter is saved on the same date, the
file is automatically named in the order “Param_date_000.xml,”
“Param_date_001.xml,” “Param_date_002.xml” and so on. Parameter
saves of up to “Param_date_999.xml” can be made.
A sequential number from 000 to 999 will be added to the file name.
To specify the file name, set User Specified Name in File Name Settings
in Copy Settings. The parameter saving file name can be specified when
saving.
3.4.3 “Copy Settings”
3-46
3.6
Save and Recall Functions
Files will be saved in the following directory of the save target drive
(Device).
specified in
\Anritsu Corporation\Signal Analyzer\User Data\ Parameter Setting
Up to 1000 files can be saved in the folder.
Saving waveform data
<Procedure>
Press
from the Signal Analyzer and Spectrum Analyzer screen
to display the Save function menu shown in Table 3.6.1-1.
2.
(Device) to change the save destination. When the Setting
Press
window is displayed, select the drive to be saved and then press
(Set) to set.
3.
(Save
When the save destination has been determined, press
Waveform CSV DATA). The save target will be the waveform data
(Trace).
Table 3.6.1-1 Save function menu
Function
Key
F1
F3
F4
F5
Menu Display
Device
(D:)
Save Limit
Save on Event
Save Waveform CSV
DATA
F7
Save Application
F8
Close
Function
Changes the saving destination.
Displays the Save Limit function menu.
Displays the Save on Event function menu.
Saves the displayed waveform data (Trace).
Saves the parameter setting conditions of all the
launched applications.
Returns to the Configuration screen.
A sequential number from 00 to 99 will be added to the file name. If a file
with file number 99 is used, no more files can be saved.
To specify the file name, set User Specified Name in File Name Settings
in Copy Settings. The waveform data file name can be specified when
saving.
3.4.3 “Copy Settings”
Files will be saved in the following directory of the save target drive
(Device).
specified in
\Anritsu Corporation\Signal Analyzer\User Data\Trace Data
The maximum number of files in one folder is:
Signal Analyzer: 1000
Spectrum Analyzer: 100
3-47
3
Common Operations
1.
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.6.2
Recalling parameters
With the MS2840A, settings can be restored by loading saved setting
conditions from the internal SSD or a USB memory stick.
Recalling parameter setting conditions only of applications to be operated using Application Switch
<Procedure>
3-48
1.
Press
from the Configuration, Signal Analyzer, or Spectrum
Analyzer screen to display the Recall function menu shown in Table
3.6.2-1.
2.
(Device) to change the location of saved parameter setting
Press
conditions. When the Setting window is displayed, select the drive in
which parameter setting conditions are saved, and then press
(Set) to set.
3.
(Recall Current Application) to display the Parameter
Press
Save Data List.
4.
Select the parameter setting conditions to be recalled with the cursor,
(Set) to recall parameter setting conditions to
and then press
the application.
3.6
Save and Recall Functions
Recalling parameter setting conditions for all launched applications.
<Procedure>
Press
from the Configuration, Signal Analyzer or Spectrum
Analyzer screen to display the Recall function menu shown in Table
3.6.2-1.
2.
(Device) to change the location of saved setting
Press
parameters. When the Setting window is displayed, select the drive
(Set) to
in which setting parameters are saved, and then press
set.
3.
(Recall all Application) to display the Parameter Save
Press
Data List.
4.
Select the parameter setting conditions to be recalled with the cursor,
(Set) to recall the parameter setting conditions
and then press
to all loaded applications.
Table 3.6.2-1 Recall function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Device
(D:)
F6
Recall Current Appli
cation
F7
Recall all Application
F8
Close
Function
Changes the saving destination.
Displays the Parameter Save Data List.
This function is used to recall the parameter
setting conditions of only the current
application.
Displays the Parameter Save Data List.
This function is used to recall the parameter
setting conditions of all the loaded applications.
Returns to the Configuration screen.
3-49
3
Common Operations
1.
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.6.3
Screen hard copy
A displayed screen image can be saved to the internal SSD or a USB
memory stick as a BMP or PNG formatted file.
The conditions for copying a screen image can be set in the Copy Settings
screen. Refer to the following section for details.
3.4.3 “Copy Settings”
Executing screen hard copy
<Procedure>
1.
Display the screen to be saved.
2.
Press
to save the screen image to the selected media in BMP or
PNG format. A saved file name is displayed when saving is
completed.
The image file will be output with the file name
“Copy_Date_Sequence_Number.bmp”. When screen hard copies are made
on the same date, they are automatically named in an order as
“Copy_Date_000.bmp”, “Copy_Date_001.bmp”, “Copy_Date_002.bmp”,
and so on. Screen hard copies of up to “Copy_Date_999.bmp” can be made.
A sequential number from 000 to 999 will be added to the file name.
Files will be saved in the following directory of the save target drive
(Device).
specified in
\Anritsu Corporation\Signal Analyzer\User Data\Copy Files
Up to 1000 files can be saved in the folder.
3-50
3.6
3.6.4
Save and Recall Functions
Simple Save&Recall
This function allows parameter setting conditions to be recalled with
little operations.
Enabling Simple Save&Recall
<Procedure>
1.
Press
to display the Configuration screen.
2.
Press
to display page 2 of the Configuration function menu.
3.
Press
(Save&Recall Settings) to display the Save&Recall
Settings function menu in Figure 3.6.4-1.
Common Operations
F1
3
F1
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Figure 3.6.4-1 Save&Recall Settings function menu
Table 3.6.4-1 Save&Recall Settings function menu
Menu Display
Save&Recall Mode
Simple Save&Recall
Name
Description
Switches the Save&Recall mode.
Set the Standard mode or Simple mode.
3.6.1 “Saving parameters and wavefo
rm data”
3.6.2 “Recalling parameters”
Use this item to change the parameter name
(file name) to be saved from the default
setting in Simple mode.
3-51
Chapter 3 Common Operations
Changing the parameter name (file name) to be saved from the default setting
Pressing
(Simple Save&Recall Name) in Figure 3.6.4-1 displays the
Simple Save&Recall Name function menu in Figure 3.6.4-2. Up to ten
parameter names can be registered in Simple mode.
The default parameter names are PRM_1 to PRM_10.
To change the parameter name, press the function key to be changed.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Figure 3.6.4-2 Simple Save&Recall Name function menu
3-52
3.6
Save and Recall Functions
Simple Save function
Pressing
in Simple mode displays the Simple Save function menu in
Figure 3.6.4-3.
F1
F2
3
F3
F4
Common Operations
F5
F6
F7
F8
Figure 3.6.4-3 Simple Save function menu
Parameter names set with the Simple Save&Recall Name function menu
are displayed on the function keys.
When the Protect of the parameter saving file has been set to On (when
set to Read-only), the relevant function key is grayed out, and if it is
pressed, an error message is displayed.
The last saved date and time of the parameter saving file is displayed in
the second line. If the corresponding parameter saving file does not exist,
“***” is displayed on the function key.
In the example in Figure 3.6.4-3, the parameter name of PRM_2 has
been changed to the parameter name of PTEST. Also, PRM_3 file has
been set to Read-only.
Pressing the function key stores the parameter saving file with the
parameter name displayed.
\Anritsu Corporation\Signal Analyzer\User Data\Parameter Setting
The parameter settings can be saved in Standard mode on Open Save
Menu.
3.6.1 “Saving parameters and waveform data”
3-53
Chapter 3 Common Operations
Simple Recall function
Pressing
in Simple mode displays the Simple Recall function menu
in Figure 3.6.4-4.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Figure 3.6.4-4 Simple Recall function menu
Parameter names set with the Simple Save&Recall Name function menu
are displayed on the function keys.
The last saved date and time of the parameter saving file is displayed in
the second line.
Pressing the function key executes Recall of the corresponding parameter
saving file.
If the corresponding parameter saving file does not exist, the function
key is grayed out, and if it is pressed, an error message is displayed.
The parameter settings can be recalled in Standard mode on Open Recall
Menu.
3.6.2 “Recalling parameters”
3-54
3.7
Initializing
3.7 Initializing
This section describes how to initialize settings.
3.7.1
Preset
Preset is a function for initializing application settings. Configuration
screen settings are not initialized using this function. Similarly, there is
no effect on user data saved to the internal SSD.
3
<Procedure>
Press
to display the Preset function menu.
2.
Press
(Preset) to initialize only applications to be operated
using the Application Switch.
3.
(Preset All Application) to initialize all loaded
Press
applications.
Table 3.7.1-1 Preset function menu
Function
Key
F1
F5
F6
F8
Menu Display
Function
Initializes only the application subject to
operation by the Application Switch.
Preset All Application Initializes all the loaded applications.
Reboot
Restarts the equipment.
Closes the current menu screen and returns to
Close
the Configuration screen.
Preset
3-55
Common Operations
1.
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3.7.2
System Reset
System Reset is a function for initializing all installed applications and
Configuration screen settings, and deleting all user data saved to the
internal SSD.
Note:
User data deleted by executing this function cannot be recovered.
<Procedure>
1.
Press
to display the Configuration screen.
2.
Press
(System Information) and then press
page 2 of the System Information function menu.
3.
Press
4.
The MS2840A restarts automatically when System Reset is
completed.
to display
(System Reset) to execute System Reset.
Table 3.7.2-1 System Information function menu (2/2)
Function
Key
Page 2
3-56
Menu Display
System Information
F1
System Reset
F7
Information Save
Function
, then
, and then
Pressing
displays page 2 of the System Information
menu.
Initializes all the installed applications and the
Configuration screen settings, and erases all the
user data saved on the internal SSD. Erased
user data cannot be recovered.
Saves the system information
3.8
Installing and Uninstalling
3.8 Installing and Uninstalling
This section describes the procedure for installing application software
and licenses.
3.8.1
Installing software
Preparation for installing USB memory stick
<Procedure>
Connect the USB memory stick to the PC, and then insert the
installation disk.
2.
Select MS2840A Install from Install Software on the installation
menu.
3.
Specify the root directory of the connected USB memory stick on the
installation directory specification window (e.g., “E:\” when the USB
memory stick is drive E).
4.
Click OK to copy the installation data into the USB memory stick.
The installation data is copied into the “E:\Anritsu
Corporation\Signal Analyzer\Install” folder, when the USB memory
stick is drive E.
Set the same folder configuration before the installation, in order to
manually install by copying a set of the installation files in the USB
memory stick and drive D.
Installing software
<Procedure>
1.
Remove the peripheral devices from the USB ports of the MS2840A,
other than mouse and keyboard.
2.
Press
to display the Configuration screen, and then press
(Software Install) from page 2 of the Configuration function menu.
3.
The Software Install menu shown in Figure 3.8.1-1 is displayed.
(Install).
Press
4.
The installation selection menu is displayed. Insert the USB
memory stick containing the purchased software data into the USB
port of the MS2840A.
Note:
Do not insert any devices other than USB memory stick to the USB
ports during installation.
5.
Press
(Software) to display the device selection window.
3-57
3
Common Operations
1.
Chapter 3 Common Operations
6.
Select the USB memory stick containing the software with the
(Set). The versions of the already
cursor, and then press
installed software (Installed Applications) and of the software to
install (Installation Package on XX) are displayed. They cannot be
selected and installed individually.
7.
When pressing
(Install), a message box asking "Do you install
the application software?" is displayed. Press Yes to start
installation.
8.
The MS2840A restarts automatically when the installation is
completed.
Figure 3.8.1-1 Software Install menu
3-58
3.8
Installing and Uninstalling
Installing software licenses
<Procedure>
1.
Press
to display the Configuration function screen, and then
(Software Install) from page 2 of the Configuration
press
function menu.
2.
The Software Install menu shown in Figure 3.8.1-2 is displayed.
(Install).
Press
3.
The installation selection menu is displayed. Insert the USB
memory stick containing the purchased software license data into
the USB port of the MS2840A.
3
(Software License) to display the device selection window.
Press
5.
Select the USB memory stick containing the software license with
(Set). The licenses already installed
the cursor, and then press
(Installed Licenses) and the licenses to install (Installation Licenses
on XX) are displayed. Select licenses to install.
6.
When pressing
(Install), a message box asking "Do you install
the selected application software license?" is displayed. Press Yes to
start installation.
7.
The license becomes valid when the MS2840A is restarted after
installation is completed.
Figure 3.8.1-2 Software Install menu
3-59
Common Operations
4.
Chapter 3 Common Operations
Installing waveform pattern licenses
<Procedure>
1.
to display the Configuration screen, and then press
Press
(Software Install) from page 2 of the Configuration function menu.
2.
The Software Install menu shown in Figure 3.8.1-3 is displayed.
Press
(Install).
3.
The installation selection menu is displayed. Insert the USB
memory stick containing the purchased waveform pattern license
data into the USB port of the MS2840A.
4.
Press
5.
Select the USB memory stick containing the waveform pattern
license with the cursor, and then press
(Set). The licenses
already installed (Installed Licenses) and the licenses to install
(Installation Licenses on XX) are displayed. Select licenses to install.
6.
When pressing
(Install), a message box asking "Do you install
the selected SG Waveform license?" is displayed. Press Yes to start
installation.
7.
The license will be valid when the MS2840A is restarted after
installation is completed.
(SG Wave License) to display the device selection window.
Figure 3.8.1-3 Software Install menu
3-60
3.8
Installing and Uninstalling
3.8.2 Uninstalling software
The Install screen must be displayed in order to uninstall software or
license files from the MS2840A.
Uninstalling software
<Procedure>
1.
Press
to display the Configuration screen, and then press
(Software Install) from page 2 of the Configuration function menu.
2.
The Software Install menu shown in Figure 3.8.2-1 is displayed.
(Uninstall).
Press
3.
The installation selection menu is displayed. Press
4.
The installed software list screen is displayed. Select the software to
be uninstalled from the installed software with the cursor.
5.
When pressing (Uninstall), a message box asking "Do you uninstall
the selected application software?" is displayed. Press Yes to start
uninstallation.
3
(Software).
3-61
Common Operations
Figure 3.8.2-1 Software Install menu
Chapter 3 Common Operations
Uninstalling software licenses
<Procedure>
1.
Press
to display the Configuration screen, and then press
(Software Install) from page 2 of the Configuration function menu.
2.
The Software Install menu shown in Figure 3.8.2-2 is displayed.
(Uninstall).
Press
3.
The installation selection menu is displayed. Press
License).
4.
The installed software license list screen is displayed. Select the
software license to be uninstalled from the installed software
licenses with the cursor.
5.
When pressing
(Uninstall), a message box asking "Do you
uninstall the selected application software license?" is displayed.
Press Yes to start uninstallation.
Figure 3.8.2-2 Software Install menu
3-62
(Software
3.8
Installing and Uninstalling
Uninstalling waveform pattern licenses
<Procedure>
1.
to display the Configuration screen, and then press
Press
(Software Install) from page 2 of the Configuration function menu.
2.
The Software Install menu shown in Figure 3.8.2-3 is displayed.
Press
(Uninstall).
3.
The installation selection menu is displayed. Press
License).
4.
The installed waveform pattern license list screen is displayed.
Select the waveform pattern license to be uninstalled from the
installed waveform pattern licenses with the cursor.
5.
When pressing
(Uninstall), a message box asking "Do you
uninstall the selected SG Waveform license?" is displayed. Press Yes
to start uninstallation.
(SG Wave
3
3-63
Common Operations
Figure 3.8.2-3 Software Install menu
Chapter 3 Common Operations
3-64.
Chapter 4 Tutorial
This chapter describes the waveform display of the signal analyzer and
spectrum analyzer.
4.1
4.2
Spectrum Analysis Using Signal Analyzer .................... 4-2
4.1.1 Spectrum analysis ............................................ 4-2
Spectrum Analysis Using Spectrum Analyzer .............. 4-6
4.2.1 Spectrum Analysis ............................................ 4-6
4
Tutorial
4-1
Chapter 4 Tutorial
4.1 Spectrum Analysis Using Signal Analyzer
Option 006/106 is required to use the signal analyzer function.
4.1.1
Spectrum analysis
The section describes the operation procedure for displaying input signal
waveforms to the application screen of the signal analyzer.
Figure 4.1.1-1 Front panel
Example: Input Signal: Frequency: 1 GHz (CW)
Level:
−10 dBm
4-2
4.1
Spectrum Analysis Using Signal Analyzer
<Procedure>
1.
Connect the input signal to the RF Input on the front panel of the
MS2840A.
2.
Press
then
(Application Switch Settings) to display the
Application Switch Settings menu.
3.
Press
(Load Application Select) to select within the “Unload
Applications” column of the application with the cursor. Select
“Signal Analyzer” here with the cursor, and then press
(Set).
4.
Check that “Signal Analyzer” is displayed within the “Loaded
Applications” column then press
.
5. Pressing the function key corresponding to the Signal Analyzer from
the Application Switch Settings menu displays the application main
screen of the Signal Analyzer.
[1]
[8]
[9]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
Figure 4.1.1-2 Application main screen
4-3
Tutorial
[10]
4
Chapter 4 Tutorial
Table 4.1.1-1 Display items for Signal Analyzer
Item
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Description
This is the main function key of the signal analyzer. Basic
parameter settings of the signal analyzer are configured here.
Signal Analyzer Function Operation
2.1 “Display Description”
Displays signal waveforms.
Displays the center frequency, frequency span and other
frequency parameters.
Signal Analyzer Function Operation
2.2 “Setting Frequency”
Displays the reference level, input attenuator value and other
level parameters.
Signal Analyzer Function Operation
2.3 “Setting Level”
Displays the trigger source, trigger level and other trigger
parameters.
Signal Analyzer Function Operation
3.2 “Trigger Function”
Displays the start frequency.
Signal Analyzer Function Operation
2.2.3 “Setting start frequency”
Displays the stop frequency.
Signal Analyzer Function Operation
2.2.4 “Setting stop frequency”
Displays the analysis start time, analysis time span,
resolution bandwidth and other Spectrum trace parameters.
Signal Analyzer Function Operation
4.2.1 “What is Spectrum trace?”
Displays marker values.
Signal Analyzer Function Operation
4.2.9 “Setting marker search”
This is used as an indictor expressing an analysis progression
rate.
6.
Frequency settings must be changed to display the input signal in
the waveform display screen. Press
(Frequency).
7.
Press
(Center Frequency) and then enter the desired frequency
using the numeric keypad. The center frequency setup window is
displayed.
Figure 4.1.1-3 Center frequency setup window
4-4
4.1
8.
Spectrum Analysis Using Signal Analyzer
Enter the center frequency then select the unit, from GHz, MHz,
kHz, and Hz.
Example: To set 1 GHz for the center frequency, press
(GHz).
and then
The waveform of the input signal is now displayed on the screen (see
Figure 4.1.1-4).
4
Tutorial
Figure 4.1.1-4 Waveform display using Signal Analyzer
Refer to the MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation Manual
(Signal Analyzer Function Operation) for how to use the Signal Analyzer.
4-5
Chapter 4 Tutorial
4.2 Spectrum Analysis Using Spectrum Analyzer
4.2.1
Spectrum Analysis
This section describes the operation procedure for displaying input signal
waveforms to the application screen of the spectrum analyzer.
Figure 4.2.1-1 Front panel
Example: Input Signal: Frequency:
Level:
<Procedure>
4-6
1 GHz (CW)
−10 dBm
1.
Connect the input signal to the RF Input on the front panel of the
MS2840A.
2.
Press
then
(Application Switch Settings) to display the
Application Switch Settings menu.
3.
Press
(Load Application Select) to select within the “Unload
Applications” column of the application with the cursor. Select
“Spectrum Analyzer” here with the cursor, and then press
(Set).
4.
Check that “Spectrum Analyzer” is displayed within the “Loaded
Applications” column then press
.
5.
Pressing the function key corresponding to the Spectrum Analyzer
from the Application Switch Settings menu displays the application
main screen of the Spectrum Analyzer.
4.2
Spectrum Analysis Using Spectrum Analyzer
The application is shipped already loaded.
The application is set to start automatically at power startup.
4
Tutorial
Figure 4.2.1-2 Application main screen
4-7
Chapter 4 Tutorial
Table 4.2.1-1 Display items for Spectrum Analyzer
Item
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Description
This is the main function key of the spectrum analyzer. Basic
parameter settings of the spectrum analyzer are configured
here.
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
2.1 “Display Description”
Displays signal waveforms.
Displays the start frequency.
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
2.3.3 “Setting start frequency”
Displays the stop frequency.
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
2.3.4 “Setting stop frequency”
Displays trace parameters.
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
Chapter 3 “Selecting Display Mode”
Displays the wave detection mode status.
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
3.1.4 “Setting wave detection mode”
Displays the resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth, input
attenuator and sweep time parameters.
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
2.4.2 “Setting input attenuator”
2.5 “Setting RBW/VBW”
Displays marker values.
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
4.1 “Setting Marker”
Displays the reference level.
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
2.4.1 “Setting reference level”
Displays the number of trace points
Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation
3.3 “Setting Time/Sweep”
6.
Frequency settings must be changed to display the input signal to
the waveform display screen. Press
(Frequency).
7.
Press
(Center Frequency) and then enter the desired frequency
using the numeric keypad. The center frequency setup window is
displayed.
Figure 4.2.1-3 Center frequency setup window
4-8
4.2
8.
Spectrum Analysis Using Spectrum Analyzer
Enter the center frequency then select the unit, from GHz, MHz,
kHz, and Hz.
Example: To set 1 GHz for the center frequency, press
(GHz).
9.
and then
Return to the main screen of the spectrum analyzer to change
frequency span. Press
.
10. Press
(Span). Enter the desired frequency bandwidth using the
numeric keypad.
11. Enter the frequency bandwidth then select the unit of the value.
The waveform of the input signal is now displayed on the screen (see
Figure 4.2.1-4).
4
Tutorial
Figure 4.2.1-4 Waveform display using Spectrum Analyzer
Refer to the MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer Operation Manual
(Spectrum Analyzer Function Operation) for how to use the Spectrum
Analyzer.
4-9
Chapter 4 Tutorial
4-10.
Chapter 5 System
The MS2840A uses Microsoft Windows Embedded Standard 7
(hereinafter, referred to as “Windows”) as the operating system. Settings
for Windows and the system can be operated by connecting a mouse and
a keyboard.
This section describes how to perform operations on Windows installed to
the MS2840A and general notes.
5.1
5.2
5.3
Setting Windows ........................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Displaying Windows Desktop ........................... 5-3
5.1.2 Setting Control Panel........................................ 5-4
5.1.3 Using external display ...................................... 5-6
5.1.4 General notes ................................................... 5-7
Storage Device Configuration ....................................... 5-8
System Recovery Functions ......................................... 5-9
5.3.1 Paragon Drive Backup.................................... 5-11
5
System
5-1
Chapter 5 System
5.1 Setting Windows
The MS2840A is set to default settings at factory shipment so as to
perform optimal measurements. Changing the Windows settings is
outside the scope of operation warranty. In addition, performance may
drop or functions may not operate correctly when Windows settings are
changed. Carefully read the general notes of this section when changes to
Windows settings are required.
When the system fails to operate correctly due to Windows operation,
execute system recovery functions to restore the MS2840A to its status at
factory shipment. See 5.3 “System Recovery Functions” for details.
WARNING
The MS2840A operations are not guaranteed when the
Windows settings are changed from the default shipment
status.
Installing a program not recommended or admitted by
Anritsu Corporation is prohibited by the license with
Microsoft. However, it is the customer's responsibility to
purchase, install, and operate antivirus software.
WARNING
Performing system recovery will cause software
installation (including updates) after factory shipment of
the MS2840A and application settings to be lost. In
addition, data (measurements, parameters, etc.) recorded
by the customer may be deleted depending on the method
to perform system recovery.
5-2
5.1
5.1.1
Setting Windows
Displaying Windows Desktop
Connect a mouse and a keyboard to operate Windows. Use the USB
mouse included as standard equipment and a compatible keyboard
(USB).
The following are methods to display the Windows Desktop. To display
or select an application
applications of the MS2840A again, press
in the Windows Taskbar.
Mouse
Click the “Minimize” button located in the upper right corner of the
application window of the MS2840A. Minimizing all applications displays
the Desktop.
Keyboard
Pressing the [Windows] key + [D] key minimizes all windows and
displays the Windows Desktop.
5
System
5-3
Chapter 5 System
5.1.2
Setting Control Panel
Various Windows settings can be configured using the Control Panel. The
following describes general notes on each setting. Although each setting
can be configured without using the Control Panel, use these within the
scope of the following restrictions.
The MS2840A may not operate normally when any other Windows
settings are changed from the factory defaults.
Program and Hardware
• Do not delete the installed devices or update/delete the drivers.
• The MS2840A may not operate normally due to conflicts with device
drivers when new hardware is added.
• Do not update or remove programs installed at the factory.
• Anritsu does not warrant operations of the MS2840A when programs
not guaranteed are installed.
Windows Update
• Automatic updating of Windows is turned off at the factory. Anritsu
does not warrant operations of the MS2840A when the setting is
changed.
Network Connection
• TCP/IP settings may change when the MS2840A is remote-controlled
through Ethernet. For details, refer to the
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A Signal
Analyzer Operation Manual (Mainframe Remote Control).
• The IP address is set to use DHCP before shipment from the factory.
Ensure that the network administrator settings are appropriate when
connecting the MS2840A to a network.
User Account
• Automatic login with the following settings is enabled at the factory.
Do not change the User Account settings shown below.
Account Name
“ANRITSU”
Password
(None)
Account Type
Computer Administrator
• New user accounts can be created. Specify “Computer Administrator”
for the account type of the user account to be created. Applications will
not start up normally with user accounts created using Limited
(Power User).
5-4
5.1
Setting Windows
Security
• Firewall settings are set to Off at the factory. When settings are set to
On, Windows Firewall displays a dialog box asking if you want to
block the applications of the MS2840A at the next startup time. Be
sure to click Unblock.
• Antivirus software is not installed at the factory. Anritsu strongly
recommends installing antivirus software when connecting the
MS2840A to a network. However, the MS2840A may not be
remote-controlled through Ethernet if the function blocking external
communications works.
• Security warnings are not displayed by factory default.
Date & Time
• You can change the date, time and time zone.
• Internet Time is set to Off by factory default. Operations may be
affected; therefore, do not change this setting.
5
Display
• Operations may be affected by changing screen resolution, refresh rate
or monitor power management or turning on the screen saver.
System
• The Computer Name can be changed. The factory default name is “SA”
+ “Serial Number”.
• Do not change Hardware or Advanced settings.
• Do not enable the System Restore. Otherwise, the MS2840A may not
operate normally.
Power Option
• The settings for the Auto Power Off function (Turn off Monitor) of the
display can be changed.
• The Power Off function of the SSD (Turn off Hard Disks) is disabled
(Never). Do not change this setting.
• Do not change power option settings other than those described above.
The MS2840A will not operate normally after recovering from
hibernation.
5-5
System
• This setting must be changed when using an external monitor with
connected to the VGA connector of the MS2840A. Refer to Section
5.1.3 “Using external display” for details.
Chapter 5 System
5.1.3
Using external display
An external display can be connected to the VGA connector on the rear
side of the MS2840A, to display screens of the MS2840A and show
multiple displays. The following describes the operation procedure for
this function.
<Procedure>
1.
Connect the display to the VGA connector on the rear of the
MS2840A.
2.
Open the Intel Graphics and Media Control Panel by one of the
following methods:
• In Control Panel of Windows, launch the Intel Graphics and
Media.
• Press Ctrl+Alt+F12 on the keyboard.
3.
Change the Multiple Displays settings as shown below:
When not using an external display
Single Display
• Operating Mode
Built-in Display (MS2840A display)
• Primary Display
When using only an external display
Single Display
• Operating Mode
(Connected external display)
• Primary Display
When displaying the same content on each of the MS2840A display
and external display
Clone Display
• Operating Mode
Built-in Display (MS2840A display)
• Primary Device
5-6
5.1
Setting Windows
(Connected external display)
• Secondary Device
When displaying with the MS2840A and external display connected
Extended Desktop
• Operating Mode
Built-in Display (MS2840A display)
• Primary Device
(Connected external display)
• Secondary Device
CAUTION
Turning the MS2840A power On when an external display
is not connected to the VGA connector initializes to
mainframe display only. When continuously using an
external display, it is recommended to keep the external
monitor connected for use.
CAUTION
5
Do not change the resolution, refresh rate or power
5.1.4
General notes
System
management settings of the mainframe monitor.
The MS2840A operations are guaranteed provided it is in factory default
settings. The following situations may affect the MS2840A operations.
• Install software that is not factory-installed and operate it on the
MS2840A.
e.g.) Install antivirus software and execute virus scan.
• Enable or operate a Windows program service that is disabled or
stopped at factory.
e.g.) Transfer files by FTP while the MS2840A is running.
In addition to the above, note the below.
• The MS2840A may not work properly when the registries are changed.
5-7
Chapter 5 System
5.2 Storage Device Configuration
The MS2840A has a built-in SSD for storing the operating system,
application software, user data, and the like.
The SSD of the MS2840A consists of the following partitions.
Volume C: System Disk
Windows, application software and files required for operation of the
MS2840A are stored. The MS2840A may not operate normally when data
required for operating the MS2840A are changed or deleted. Do not
operate data of this volume at normal use.
Volume D: User Disk
This volume is used mainly for inputting files to and as the output
destination for the application software of the MS2840A. Adding data to
this volume or deleting data on it will not affect MS2840A operations.
A USB memory stick, used for installing application software and
inputting or outputting data, is included as standard equipment with the
MS2840A. The USB memory stick is recognized as Drive E at factory
shipment.
Note the following items when operating MS2840A:
• Do not change the partition configuration. Doing so may affect system
operation.
• Do not format the SSD of the MS2840A. Besides the above, data for
system recovery is stored within this SSD. Recovery may become
inoperable when the SSD is formatted.
• The volumes and folders described above are not set to be shared at
factory shipment. Although sharing is an effective means for
transferring data to and from an external PC, be mindful of security
when connecting to a network.
5-8
5.3
System Recovery Functions
5.3 System Recovery Functions
The MS2840A has system recovery functions to restore data on the SSD
to the factory shipment status. These functions can be used in the event
of system instability.
The MS2840A comes with factory-installed recovery software, Pro or
Paragon Drive Backup. To start the installed recovery software, start the
MS2840A, and press the F4 key on the BIOS screen.
<Procedure>
1.
Disconnect the MS2840A from the network if connected.
2.
Connect the keyboard and mouse to the mainframe, and then turn
the MS2840A power On. The BIOS screen will appear in a few
seconds after (The message “Press F2 for System Utilities” appears
at the bottom part of the screen).
3.
Press the F4 key (not
on the front panel of the mainframe)
while the screen in Step 2 is displayed.
4.
Only when the screen displays the message “Press F4 to start
recovery from Backup Capsule”, press the F4 key again.
5.
According to the software instructions on the screen, perform a
system recovery.
5
System
Paragon Drive Backup
Refer to Section 5.3.1 “Paragon Drive Backup”.
5-9
Chapter 5 System
CAUTION
To execute these functions, understand the following
items for their use.
• All applications and updates added after factory
shipment will be lost. Additionally, all data recorded to
Volume C will be restored to the factory shipment status.
Backup important data before executing these functions.
• The user data area of Volume D can be restored to the
factory shipment status depending on the function to be
selected. So as not to lose important user data due to
incorrect operations, it is recommended to backup data
in Volume D before executing these functions.
• Data deleted by these functions cannot be restored.
• The backup data is saved to an unknown partition on the
Disk 0. If the unknown partition is accidentally deleted,
the backup data required for system recovery is deleted
as well.
5-10
5.3
5.3.1
System Recovery Functions
Paragon Drive Backup
This subsection describes how to perform a system recovery with
factory-installed recovery software “Paragon Drive Backup”.
Type: Partition
This function restores only Volume C, in which Windows, application
software, and files required for operations of the MS2840A are stored, to
the factory shipment status.
Type: Disk
This function restores Volume C and Volume D to the factory shipment
status. Although Volume D is mainly used as a storage area for user data,
all data on Volume D will be erased.
<Procedure>
1.
After the screen displaying “Drive Backup” appears, the following
alternatives are displayed on the screen:
Normal Mode
Safe Mode
2.
When the menu screen appears in about a minute, double-click
[Simple Restore Wizard].
3.
The [Paragon Simple Restore Wizard] appears, so click [Next].
4.
The following alternatives are displayed on the screen:
Type: Partition
Recovers only Volume C.
Type: Disk
Recovers Volumes C and D.
Double-click either of them, and then click [NEXT].
5.
When the confirmation screen appears, click [Yes] to start a system
recovery. Then, the [Progress information] dialog box appears, and
the recovery process starts.
Do not click [Cancel] when a system recovery is in progress.
Although the required time for recovery varies depending on the
conditions, it normally takes between 10 and 30 minutes. The
progress of recovery is shown during recovery. Although the progress
indicator may close during recovery, this is a normal operation.
5-11
System
Select [Normal Mode] with the arrow keys, and then press the Enter
key.
5
Chapter 5 System
5-12.
6.
Upon completion of the recovery process, click [Close]. ([Close]
appears after the recovery process is completed.)
7.
When the completion screen appears, click [Finish] to return to the
menu screen described in Step 5. Click [Reboot the computer] to
reboot the MS2840A, or click [Power off] to turn the power Off.
Chapter 6 Performance Test
This chapter describes measurement devices, setup methods, and
performance test procedures required for performing performance tests
as preventive maintenance of the MS2840A.
6.1
6.2
Overview of Performance Test ..................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Performance test .............................................. 6-2
6.1.2 Performance test items and instruments used . 6-3
Performance Test Items ............................................... 6-5
6.2.1 Display frequency accuracy ............................. 6-6
6.2.2 Frequency span display accuracy .................... 6-8
6.2.3 Single sideband noise level ............................ 6-10
6.2.4 RF frequency characteristics .......................... 6-13
6.2.5 Display average noise level ............................ 6-18
6.2.6 Second harmonic wave distortion .................. 6-26
6
Performance Test
6-1
Chapter 6 Performance Test
6.1 Overview of Performance Test
6.1.1
Performance test
Performance tests are performed as part of preventive maintenance in
order to prevent the performance of the MS2840A from being degraded
before it occurs.
Use performance tests when required for acceptance inspection, routine
inspection and performance verification after repairs. Perform items
deemed critical at regular intervals as preventive maintenance. Perform
the following performance tests for acceptance inspection, routine
inspection and performance verification after repairs of the MS2840A.






Display frequency accuracy
Frequency span display accuracy
Single sideband noise level
RF frequency characteristics
Display average noise level
Second harmonic wave distortion
Perform items deemed critical at regular intervals as preventive
maintenance. A recommended cycle for routine tests of once or twice a
year is desirable.
If items that do not meet the required level are detected during
performance testing, contact an Anritsu Service and Sales office. Contact
information is available in a separate file (for the PDF version), and on
the last page of this manual (for the printed version).
6-2
6.1
6.1.2
Overview of Performance Test
Performance test items and instruments used
Table 6.1.2-1 lists measuring instruments used or performance tests.
Table 6.1.2-1 List of measuring instruments for performance test
Test Items
Display frequency accuracy
Frequency span display
accuracy
Single sideband noise level
Required Performance
Signal generator
(MG3691C/94C)
With Option 004 or 005
Signal generator
(MG3691C/94C)
With Option 004 or 005
Signal generator
(HP8665B Equivalent)
6
Performance Test
 Frequency range: 500 MHz to 31 GHz
1 Hz resolution available
 Output level range: 20 to 0 dBm
0.1 dB resolution available
 Frequency range: 300 MHz to 40 GHz
1 Hz resolution available
 Output level range: 20 to 0 dBm
0.1 dB resolution available
 Frequency range: 1 GHz, 1 MHz offset
1 Hz resolution available
 Output level range: 10 to 10 dBm
0.1 dB resolution available
 SSB phase noise: 130 dBc/Hz or less
(at 10 kHz offset)
 SSB phase noise: 130 dBc/Hz or less
(at 100 kHz offset)
 SSB phase noise: 150 dBc/Hz or less
(at 1 MHz offset)
 External reference input: (10 MHz)
available
Name of Recommended
Device (Model Name)
6-3
Chapter 6 Performance Test
Table 6.1.2-1 List of measuring instruments for performance test (Cont’d)
Test Items
RF frequency
characteristics
Required Performance
 Frequency range: 10 MHz to 40 GHz
1 Hz resolution available
 Output level range: 20 to 0 dBm
0.1 dB resolution available
 Frequency range: 10 MHz to 40 GHz
 Measurement power range –67 to +20
dBm
 Mainframe accuracy ±0.02 dB
Display average noise level
 Frequency range: DC to 44.5 GHz
 VSWR: 1.2 or less
 50 Ω

Second harmonic wave
distortion
6-4



Name of Recommended
Device (Model Name)
Signal generator
(MG3710A)
Less than 6 GHz
Signal generator
(MG3694C)
6 GHz or more
Power meter (ML2488B)
Power sensor (MA2444D)
MS2840A-040/041/044
Standard terminator
(28N50-2)
MS2840A-046
Standard terminator
(28K50)
Signal generator
(MG3710A) up to 6 GHz
Frequency range: 10 MHz to 22.25
Signal generator
GHz
(MG3694C) from 6 GHz
External reference input: (10 MHz)
Low pass filter
available
SLP-50+
: fc=55 MHz
Second harmonic wave: 30 dBc or less VLF-400 (+) : fc=560 MHz
At 2 frequency of SG output:
VLF-2250 (+) : fc=2575 MHz
Loss < 40 dB (LPF)
VLF-3000+ : fc=3600 MHz
VLF-6000(+) : fc=6800 MHz
VLF-6700+ : fc=7600 MHz
6.2
Performance Test Items
6.2 Performance Test Items
Warm up the subject testing device and measuring instruments for at
least 30 minutes except where directed, in order to stabilize them
sufficiently before running performance tests. Demonstrating maximum
measurement accuracy requires, in addition to the above, conducting
performance tests under ambient temperatures, little AC power supply
voltage fluctuations, as well as the absence of noise, vibrations, dust,
humidity or other problems.
Figure 6.2-1 Performance test
6
Performance Test
6-5
Chapter 6 Performance Test
6.2.1
Display frequency accuracy
The known frequency which is the reference for the display frequency, is
added to the MS2840A as shown in (3) then the center frequency and
frequency span are set from the front panel. The difference between the
read value of the marker display frequency (bold arrow in figure below)
of the spectrum peak point and the setting value of the center frequency
(same value as known reference frequency) is measured at this time.
The Swept Frequency Synthesizer uses the signal source phase-locked
using the same accuracy as the 10 MHz reference oscillator of the
MS2840A.
(1) Test target standards
MS2840A
 Display frequency accuracy:
 [Display frequency  Reference frequency accuracy
+ Span frequency  Span accuracy + RBW  0.05
+ 2  N + Span Frequency/(No. of trace points  1)] Hz
N indicates the mixing order (Refer to Table 1.3.1-1).
(2) Measuring instrument for tests
 Signal generator (MG3691C/94C)
(3) Setup
Ref Input
10 MHz
MS2840A
Buffer Out
10 MHz
RF Input
MG3691C/92C
Anritsu
M キ 3692A
RF Output
Figure 6.2.1-1 Display frequency accuracy test
6-6
6.2
Performance Test Items
(4) Notes on test
Set the output level of the MG3691C/94C to 20 to 10 dBm
(5) Test procedure
1.
Press
2.
Press
of the MS2840A.
3.
Press
(Preset) to perform Preset.
4.
Press
menu.
5.
Set the output frequency of the MG3691C/94C to the center
frequency (500 MHz) shown in the Display Frequency Accuracy table
of Appendix A.
6.
Set the center frequency shown in the Display Frequency Accuracy
table of Appendix A to the MS2840A.
7.
Set the frequency span (10 kHz) and the resolution bandwidth (300
Hz) corresponding to the center frequency (500 MHz) shown in the
Display Frequency Accuracy table of Appendix A to the MS2840A.
8.
Read the marker frequency value (MKR value) shown on the screen,
then check whether this value is within the range of the maximum
value and minimum value in the specified range shown in the
Display Frequency Accuracy table of Appendix A.
9.
of the MS2840A, and then select the Spectrum Analyzer.
of the MS2840A to display the Frequency function
6-7
Performance Test
Repeat Steps 5 to 8 for the center frequency and frequency span
according to the center frequency and frequency span combination
shown in the Display Frequency Accuracy table of Appendix A.
6
Chapter 6 Performance Test
6.2.2
Frequency span display accuracy
Set to the signal generator the frequencies of the first div and ninth div
from the left edge of the screen as shown in (3), and read their frequency
difference to obtain the span accuracy.
(1) Test target standards
 MS2840A
 Frequency span accuracy:
0.2%
(2) Measuring instrument for tests
 Signal generator (MG3691C/94C)
(3) Setup
Frequency
measured with SG
Ref Input
10 MHz
MS2840A
Buffer Out
10MHz
MG3691C/94C
RF Input
Anritsu
M キ 3692A
RF Output
Figure 6.2.2-1 Frequency span display accuracy test
6-8
6.2
Performance Test Items
(4) Notes on test
Although the output level of the MG3691C/94C is not specified, set
normally to 10 to 0 dBm.
(5) Test procedure
1.
Press
Analyzer.
2.
Press
of the MS2840A.
3.
Press
(Preset) to perform Preset.
4.
Connect the output of the MG3691C/94C to the RF input of the
MS2840A.
5.
Set the frequency span (10 kHz) and center frequency (3 GHz) of the
MS2840A from the Frequency Span Display Accuracy table of
Appendix A.
6.
Set the output frequency of the MG3691C/94C to the frequency
(1799.996 MHz) for f1 shown in the Frequency Span Display
Accuracy table of Appendix A.
7.
Measure the spectrum waveform peak frequency by using the
marker function of the MS2840A. This frequency is set to f1’.
8.
Set to the frequency of output frequency f2 of the MG3691C/94C
(1800.004 MHz), and then measure the spectrum waveform peak
frequency by using the marker function. This frequency is set to f2’.
6
9.
Calculate (f2’  f1’)/0.8/SPAN  100  100 [%] then check whether it
satisfies the specified range (minimum value to maximum value)
shown in the Frequency Span Display Accuracy table of Appendix A.
Performance Test
of the MS2840A, and then select the Spectrum
10. Repeat Steps 5 to 9 for each frequency span of the center frequency
shown in the Frequency Span Display Accuracy table of Appendix A.
6-9
Chapter 6 Performance Test
6.2.3
Single sideband noise level
Set the resolution bandwidth to a specific value then input a signal with
a single sideband noise level far smaller than the subject test device. Test
how far the dB drops from the peak point for a noise level which is
distanced by a specific frequency from the spectrum waveform peak point
at this time.
Sideband Noise
Actual Filter Envelope
Figure 6.2.3-1 Single sideband noise level
(1) Test target standards
 Single sideband noise: At 18 to 28C, Spectrum analyzer function
 123 dBc/Hz (Frequency 1000 MHz, 10 kHz Offset)
 123 dBc/Hz (Frequency 1000 MHz, 100 kHz Offset)
 135 dBc/Hz (Frequency 1000 MHz, 1 MHz Offset)
With MS2840A-066/166, and MS2840A-066/166 active,
SPAN  1 MHz when Spectrum analyzer function:
 –122 dBc/Hz (Frequency 500 MHz, 1 kHz Offset)
 –133 dBc/Hz (Frequency 500 MHz, 10 kHz Offset)
 –133 dBc/Hz (Frequency 500 MHz, 100 kHz Offset)
(2) Measuring instrument for tests
 Signal generator (HP8665B Equivalent)
6-10
6.2
Performance Test Items
(3) Setup
Buffer Out
10 MHz
Ref Input
10 MHz
HP8665B Equivalent
MS2840A
RF Input
RF Output
Figure 6.2.3-2 Signal sideband noise level
(4) Notes on test
Perform the test at an ambient temperature of 18 to 28C and after
warming up for at least 30 minutes.
(5) Test procedure
1.
Start the application Spectrum Analyzer of the MS2840A.
2.
Press
3.
Press
(Preset).
4.
Press
and then
5.
Set 500 MHz, 0 dBm for the HP8665B.
6.
Set as follows for the MS2840A:
Reference level
0 dBm
Attenuator
0 dB
Center Frequency
1000 MHz
VBW mode
Power
Det mode
Sample
Auto Sweep Time Select
Normal
Auto Swp Type Rules
Swept Only
Trace points
1001
Marker Zone Width
100 Hz
7.
Set the following parameters according to the offset frequency (100
kHz) of the table “Single Sideband Noise Level” in Appendix A.
Span Frequency
25 kHz
RBW
1 kHz
VBW
1 Hz
.
6
(SIGANA All).
Performance Test
6-11
Chapter 6 Performance Test
8.
Set Marker to Normal and Marker Result to Peak.
9.
Set the center frequency of the Marker zone to 1000 MHz, and
adjust the HP8665B output level so that the input level to the
MS2840A is 0 dBm±0.06 dB.
10. After setting Marker to Delta, set Marker Result to Density.
11. Shift the center frequency of the Marker zone by –10 kHz and
measure the single sideband noise level [p1] dBc/Hz.
12. Set the following parameters according to the offset frequency (100
kHz) of the table “Single Sideband Noise Level” in Appendix A.
Span Frequency
250 kHz
RBW
10 kHz
VBW
3 Hz
13. Set Marker to Normal and Marker Result to Peak, and perform Step
9 and 10.
14. Shift the center frequency of the Marker zone by –100 kHz and
measure the single sideband noise level [p2] dBc/Hz.
15. Set the following parameters according to the offset frequency (1
MHz) of the table “Single Sideband Noise Level” in Appendix A.
Span Frequency
5 MHz
RBW
100 kHz
VBW
3 Hz
16. Set Marker to Normal, Marker Result to Peak, and perform Step 9
and 10.
17. Shift the center frequency of the Marker zone by –1 MHz and
measure the single sideband noise level [p2] dBc/Hz.
6-12
6.2
6.2.4
Performance Test Items
RF frequency characteristics
Even if multiple signals with different frequencies and the same
amplitude are input to a spectrum analyzer, the amplitude of each
spectrum must be displayed equally on the screen. This section describes
how to obtain the level deviation of the frequency for each band by
inputting calibrated signals from an external device.
(1) Test target standards
 RF frequency characteristics
After CAL execution, 18 to 28°C, input attenuator = 10 dB, Frequency
Band Mode: Normal
 MS2840A
With MS2840A-008/108 and Preamplifier turned on,
and without MS2840A-066/166 or with Preamplifier turned off:
±1.0 dB
(100 kHz  frequency < 300 kHz)
0.65 dB
(300 kHz  frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz  frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz  frequency  6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz  frequency  6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
6-13
6
Performance Test
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off,
and without MS2840A-066/166 or with Preamplifier turned off:
±1.0 dB
(9 kHz  frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.35 dB
(300 kHz  frequency < 50 MHz)
±0.35 dB
(50 MHz  frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(50 MHz  frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.50 dB
(4 GHz  frequency  6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz  frequency  6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
Chapter 6 Performance Test
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169, or with Preamplifier turned
off,
Without MS2840A-067/167 or with Microwave Preselector Bypass turned
off and after Preselector Auto Tune is done:
±1.0 dB
(9 kHz  frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.35 dB
(300 kHz  frequency < 50 MHz)
±0.35 dB
(50 MHz  frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(50 MHz  frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.50 dB
(4 GHz  frequency  6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz  frequency  4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.50 dB
(6 GHz < frequency  13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(4 GHz < frequency  13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±2.50 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency  26.5 GHz)
±2.50 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency  40 GHz)
With MS2840A-008/108 and Preamplifier turned on:
±1.0 dB
(100 kHz  frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.65 dB
(300 kHz  frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz  frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz  frequency ≤ 6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz  frequency  6 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169, with Preamplifier turned on,
Without MS2840A-067/167 or with Microwave Preselector Bypassturned
off and after Preselector Auto Tune is done:
±1.0 dB
(100 kHz  frequency < 300 kHz)
±0.65 dB
(300 kHz  frequency < 4 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(300 kHz  frequency < 3.5 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±1.8 dB
(4 GHz  frequency  13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Normal)
(3.5 GHz  frequency  13.8 GHz, Frequency Band Mode: Spurious)
±2.50 dB
(13.8 GHz < frequency  26.5 GHz)
±3.50 dB
(26.5 GHz < frequency  40 GHz)
6-14
6.2
(2) Measuring instrument for tests




Signal generator
Signal generator
Power meter
Power sensor
(MG3710A)
(MG3694C)
(ML2488B)
(MA2444D)
Performance Test Items
[Less than 6 GHz]
[6 GHz or more]
(3) Setup
Buffer Out
10 MHz
Ref Input
10 MHz
MS2840A
MG3710A or MG3694C
RF Input
RF Output
Attenuator
(3 dB)
Attenuator
(3 dB)
T
Calibrator
T
Power sensor
(MA2444D)
6
Power meter
(ML2488B)
Anritsu
MS2487A
Performance Test
At initial setup, connect the MG3710A and MA2444D.
At measurement points from 6 GHz or more, replace the MG3710A
with the MG3694C.
Figure 6.2.4-1 RF frequency characteristics test
(4) Notes on test
Perform the test at an ambient temperature of 18 to 28C and after
warming up for at least 30 minutes.
Regarding the cable, attenuator, and conversion adapter, the applied
parts below are recommended.
Cable:
Attenuator:
Conversion adapter:
J0912 Coaxial cord (for 40 GHz)
41KC-3 Fixed Attenuator, 3 dB
J1398A N-SMA ADAPTOR
6-15
Chapter 6 Performance Test
(5) Test procedure
(a)
(b)
6-16
Calibrating the MG3710A (MG3691C/94C) output level
1.
Set the MG3710A (MG3691C/94C) as follows:
OUTPUT FREQ
10 MHz
OUTPUT LEVEL
4 dBm
2.
Connect the MG3710A (MG3691C/94C) output to the power
sensor of the power meter via the coaxial cable.
3.
Check the power meter display.
4.
Change the output frequency of the MG3710A (MG3691C/94C)
to the center frequency shown in the RF Frequency
Characteristics table of Appendix A. Perform calibration by
using the power meter so that the signal level at each frequency
becomes 10 dBm 0.06 dB, and then read the setting value on
the MG3710A (MG3691C/94C) and the indicated value
(calibration value) on the power meter.
Measuring RF frequency characteristics
1.
Connect the MG3710A (MG3691C/94C) RF output to the RF
input of the MS2840A using the coaxial cable.
2.
Start the application Spectrum Analyzer of the MS2840A.
3.
Press
of the MS2840A.
4.
Press
(Preset).
5.
Press
and then
6.
Set as follows for the MS2840A:
Center Freq
10 MHz
Span
0 Hz
ATT
10 dB
Reference Level
10 dBm
RBW
100 Hz
Sweep Time
50 ms
Trace Point
1001
Det Mode
RMS
7.
Output the signal (calibration value) of the MG3710A
(MG3691C/94C) calibrated in Step (a) 4 to the MS2840A.
8.
Using the burst average measurement function, set the
following parameters and measure the level.
Start Time
5 ms
Stop Time
45 ms
(SIGANA All).
6.2
9.
Performance Test Items
Repeat the measurement, changing the frequency as shown in
the RF Frequency Characteristics table of Appendix A.
10. Calculate the RF frequency characteristics, using the
calibration value of the MG3710A (MG3691C/94C) and the
indicated value on the MS2840A.
RF frequency characteristics = Indicated value on MS2840A –
calibration value (indicated value on power meter)
11. Set this instrument shown as below, only when Preamplifier
option is installed:
In the same way as shown in (a) Calibrating the MG3710A
(MG3691C/94C) output level, perform calibration by using the
power meter so that the signal level at each frequency becomes
30 dBm 0.06 dB.
to display the amplitude menu, and then press
12. Press
(Pre-amp) to set the pre-amplitude settings to On.
Calculate RF frequency characteristic, according to steps 8 and
9.
50 MHz
0 Hz
10 dB
30 dBm
100 Hz
50 ms
1001
RMS
6
Performance Test
Center Freq
Span
ATT
Reference Level
RBW
Sweep Time
Trace Point
Det Mode
6-17
Chapter 6 Performance Test
6.2.5
Display average noise level
Internal noise evenly distributed in proportion to the resolution
bandwidth across the entire measurement frequency band is referred to
as the display average noise level.
(1) Test target standards
 Display average noise level: Spectrum analyzer function
VBW = 1 Hz (Video Average), detection mode: Sample, input
attenuator 0 dB, at 18 to 28C, Frequency Band Mode: Normal.
 MS2840A
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-066/166,
and without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off:
≤ –120 dBm/Hz (9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz)
≤ –134 dBm/Hz (100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz)
≤ –153 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –151 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz)
≤ –149 dBm/Hz (2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz)
MS2840A-041 installed,
≤ –146 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
Without MS2840A-066/166,
with MS2840A-008/108, and Preamplifier turned on:
≤ –156 dBm/Hz (1 MHz)
≤ –166 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –165 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz)
≤ –164 dBm/Hz (2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz)
MS2840A-041 installed,
≤ –161 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
MS2840A-041 installed
≤ –161 dBm/Hz (4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
6-18
6.2
Performance Test Items
With MS2840A-066/166,
and without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off:
≤ –120 dBm/Hz (9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz)
≤ –133 dBm/Hz (100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz)
≤ –143 dBm/Hz (1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz)
≤ –149 dBm/Hz (10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz)
≤ –152 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz)
≤ –147 dBm/Hz (2.4 GHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-041 installed:
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
With MS2840A-066/166, with MS2840A-066/166 turned off,
with MS2840A-008/108, and Preamplifier turned on:
≤ –155 dBm/Hz (1 MHz)
≤ –165 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –164 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz)
≤ –162 dBm/Hz (2 GHz ≤ frequency < 3.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-041 installed,
≤ –158 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
6
With MS2840A-041 installed,
≤ –158 dBm/Hz (4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
Performance Test
With MS2840A-044/046 installed,
Without MS2840A-067/167/068/168/069/169:
≤ –120 dBm/Hz (9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz)
≤ –134 dBm/Hz (100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz)
≤ –153 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz)
≤ –147 dBm/Hz (2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤ –151 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –149 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –146 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-046 installed,
≤ –146 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –140 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
6-19
Chapter 6 Performance Test
Without MS2840A-067/167,
with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, and Preamplifier turned off:
≤ –120 dBm/Hz (9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz)
≤ –134 dBm/Hz (100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz)
≤ –153 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz)
≤ –147 dBm/Hz (2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤ –147 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –145 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –141 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-046 installed,
≤ –141 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –135 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –132 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
Without MS2840A-067/167,
with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, and Preamplifier turned on:
≤ –156 dBm/Hz (1 MHz)
≤ –166 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –164 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz)
≤ –163 dBm/Hz (2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz)
≤ –160 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
≤ –160 dBm/Hz (4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤ –163 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –163 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
With MS2840A-044 installed,
≤ –157 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-046 installed,
≤ –160 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –160 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –157 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –149 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
6-20
6.2
Performance Test Items
With MS2840A-067/167, without MS2840A-068/168/069/169,
and Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on or off:
≤ –147 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –145 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –141 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-046 installed,
≤ –141 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –135 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –132 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, Preamplifier
turned off, and Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on or off:
≤ –142 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –140 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –136 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-046 installed,
≤ –136 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –131 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –128 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, Preamplifier
turned on, and Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on:
With MS2840A-044 installed,
Performance Test
≤ –158 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –157 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –152 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
6
With MS2840A-046 installed,
≤ –161 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –161 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –156 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –152 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –151 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –143 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, Preamplifier
turned on, and Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off:
With MS2840A-044 installed,
≤ –162 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –160 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –159 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-046 installed,
≤ –164 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –164 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –159 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –157 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
6-21
Chapter 6 Performance Test
≤ –155 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –146 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-046, MS28470A-019/119 installed
Without MS2840A-067/167/068/168:
≤ –120 dBm/Hz (9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz)
≤ –134 dBm/Hz (100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz)
≤ –153 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz)
≤ –147 dBm/Hz (2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –149 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –146 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –146 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –142 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –137 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168,
and Preamplifier turned off:
≤ –120 dBm/Hz (9 kHz ≤ frequency < 100 kHz)
≤ –134 dBm/Hz (100 kHz ≤ frequency < 1 MHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (1 MHz ≤ frequency < 10 MHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (10 MHz ≤ frequency < 30 MHz)
≤ –153 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –150 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2.4 GHz)
≤ –147 dBm/Hz (2.4 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
≤ –144 dBm/Hz (4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤ –146 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –145 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –141 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –140 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –135 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –130 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168,
and Preamplifier turned on:
≤ –156 dBm/Hz (1 MHz)
≤ –166 dBm/Hz (30 MHz ≤ frequency < 1 GHz)
≤ –164 dBm/Hz (1 GHz ≤ frequency < 2 GHz)
6-22
6.2
Performance Test Items
≤ –163 dBm/Hz (2 GHz ≤ frequency ≤ 3.5 GHz)
≤ –160 dBm/Hz (3.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 4 GHz)
≤ –160 dBm/Hz (4 GHz < frequency ≤ 6 GHz)
≤ –163 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –163 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –160 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –159 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –156 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –149 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-067/167, without MS2840A-068/168,
and Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on/off:
≤ –147 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –145 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –141 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –140 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –135 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –129 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier turned off, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on/off:
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier turned on, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on:
≤ –161 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –161 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –156 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –152 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –151 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –143 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier turned on, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off:
≤ –164 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –164 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –159 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –157 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
6-23
6
Performance Test
≤ –142 dBm/Hz (6 GHz < frequency ≤ 13.5 GHz)
≤ –140 dBm/Hz (13.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 18.3 GHz)
≤ –136 dBm/Hz (18.3 GHz < frequency ≤ 26.5 GHz)
≤ –135 dBm/Hz (26.5 GHz < frequency ≤ 34 GHz)
≤ –131 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –125 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
Chapter 6 Performance Test
≤ –155 dBm/Hz (34 GHz < frequency ≤ 40 GHz)
≤ –146 dBm/Hz (40 GHz < frequency ≤ 44.5 GHz)
(2) Measuring instrument for tests
 Standard terminator
(28N50-2)
(28K50)
In case of MS2840A-040/041/044:
In case of MS2840A-046:
(3) Setup
MS2840A
Standard
Terminator
(Terminates RF
Input)
Figure 6.2.5-1 Display average noise level
(4) Notes on test
Perform the test at an ambient temperature of 18 to 28C and after
warming up for at least 30 minutes.
6-24
6.2
Performance Test Items
(5) Test procedure
1.
Start the application Spectrum Analyzer of the MS2840A.
2.
Press
of the MS2840A.
3.
Press
(Preset).
4.
Press
and then
5.
Terminate the RF input with the standard terminator.
6.
Set as follows for the MS2840A (time domain mode).
Center Freq
100 kHz
Span
0 Hz
Reference Level
100 dBm
RBW
1 kHz
VBW
1 Hz
VBW Mode
Video
Attenuator
0 dB
Detection
Sample
Sweep Time
1s
7.
Press
8.
Press
(Trace-A Storage Mode) then select
9.
Press
to return to the original page.
10. Press
(SIGANA All).
.
(Average).
6
(Storage Count).
11. Set the average count to 16 times.
13. Using the burst average measurement function, set the Start Time
and Stop Time parameters as follows and measure the level.
Start Time
Stop Time
100 ms
900 ms
14. The (Burst average measurement value [dBm] 30 dB) will be the
display average noise level (dBm/Hz).
15. Set the center frequency according to the Display Average Noise
Level table in Appendix A, then obtain the display average noise level
according to Steps 7 to 14.
16. Set this instrument as shown below, only when Preamplifier option is
installed:
to display the amplitude menu, and then press
Press
(Pre-amp) to set the pre-amplifier settings to On.
Calculate the display average noise level, according to steps 11 to 15.
6-25
Performance Test
(Single) to start averaging then wait until the sweep
12. Press
for an average count of 16 times is completed.
Chapter 6 Performance Test
6.2.6
Second harmonic wave distortion
A harmonic wave is generated and displayed on the screen due to
analyzer input mixer nonlinearity even when an input signal without
harmonic wave distortion is applied to the spectrum analyzer.
The second harmonic wave level will be the highest among the harmonic
waves displayed on this screen.
For the test method point, apply a distortion signal (at least 20 dB) lower
than the internal harmonic wave of the MS2840A then measure the level
difference between the fundamental wave and the second harmonic wave.
In the event a low distortion signal source cannot be obtained, apply a low
distortion signal to the MS2840A after passing through LPF.
(1) Test Target Standards
 Second harmonic wave distortion
 MS2840A
With MS2840A-040/041 installed,
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off, and at Attenuator
Mode = Mechanical Atten Only
At mixer input level: –30 dBm:
≤–60 dBc (10 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 300 MHz)
≤–65 dBc (300 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 1 GHz)
≤–65 dBc (1 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz)
At mixer input level: –20 dBm:
≤–80 dBc (2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Normal)
≤–80 dBc ( 1.75 GHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Spurious)
With MS2840A-044/046
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and without MS2840A-067/167,
and at Attenuator Mode = Mechanical Atten Only:
At mixer input level –30 dBm
≤ –60 dBc (10 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 300 MHz)
≤ –65 dBc (300 MHz < Input frequency ≤ 1 GHz)
≤ –65 dBc (1 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Normal)
≤ –65 dBc (1 GHz < Input frequency < 1.75 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Spurious)
At mixer input level –20 dBm
≤ –80 dBc (2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Normal)
≤ –80 dBc (1.75 GHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Spurious)
6-26
6.2
Performance Test Items
At mixer input level –10 dBm
≤ –80 dBc (2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Spurious)
≤ –90 dBc (3 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 13.25 GHz)
With MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and with Preamplifier turned off,
or with MS2840A-067/167 and with Microwave Preselector Bypass
turned off and at Attenuator Mode = Mechanical Atten Only:
At mixer input level –30 dBm
≤ –60 dBc (10 MHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 300 MHz)
≤ –65 dBc (300 MHz < Input frequency ≤ 1 GHz)
≤ –65 dBc (1 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Normal)
≤ –65 dBc (1 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 1.75 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Spurious)
(2) Measuring instrument for tests
 Signal generator (MG3710A) : Up to 6 GHz
MG3694C: from 6 GHz
 LPF: Items capturing an 40 dB attenuator or higher at a frequency 2
times the fundamental wave
6-27
6
Performance Test
At mixer input level –20 dBm
≤ –80 dBc (2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Normal)
≤ –80 dBc (1.75 GHz ≤ Input frequency ≤ 2 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Spurious)
At mixer input level –10 dBm
≤ –70 dBc (2 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 3 GHz, Frequency Band
Mode: Spurious)
≤ –70 dBc (3 GHz < Input frequency ≤ 13.25 GHz)
Chapter 6 Performance Test
(3) Setup
MG3710A or MG3694C
Buffer Out
10 MHz
Ref Input
10 MHz
MS2840A
RF Input
RF Output
LPF
LPF
Figure 6.2.6-1 Second harmonic wave distortion test
(4) Notes on test
Perform the test at an ambient temperature of 18 to 28C and after
warming up for at least 30 minutes.
(5) Test procedure
6-28
1.
Start the application Spectrum Analyzer of the MS2840A.
2.
Press
of the MS2840A.
3.
Press
(Preset).
4.
Press
then
5.
Set as follows for the MS2840A:
Span
50 kHz
RBW
1 kHz
VBW
1 kHz
Attenuator
10 dB
Det Mode
Positive
Sweep Time
150 ms
6.
Set the output level of the MG3710A to 20 dBm.
7.
Connect LPF according to the Second Harmonic Wave Distortion
table in Appendix A. If LPF attenuation is insufficient, use LPF in 2
stages.
8.
Set the output frequency of the MG3710A and center frequency of
the MS2840A, and reference level, according to the Second
Harmonic Wave Distortion table in Appendix A.
(SIGANA All).
6.2
9.
Performance Test Items
Adjust the output level of the signal generator so as to get the peak
point of the spectrum waveform into the range of 0.06 dB.
to perform a peak search. Set so as to include the signal
10. Press
trace peak point to the zone marker.
to display the Marker function menu, and then press
11. Press
(Delta) to set to the delta marker.
6
Figure 6.2.6-2 Fundamental wave
Performance Test
6-29
Chapter 6 Performance Test
12. In order to display the second harmonic wave on the screen, set
twice as much frequency as the center frequency. Delta marker level
reading indicates the level difference between the fundamental wave
and the second harmonic wave.
In the event the level difference is 80 dB or higher, set the reference
level to 50 dBm. Check whether the setting value of the input
attenuator is 10 dB.
Figure 6.2.6-3 Second harmonic wave
13. Repeat Steps 7 to 12, according to the Second Harmonic Wave
Distortion table in Appendix A.
6-30.
Chapter 7 Power Meter
This chapter describes basic operations of the power meter functions.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Power Meter.................................................................. 7-2
Display Description ....................................................... 7-3
Function Menu .............................................................. 7-5
7.3.1 Setting the frequency........................................ 7-6
7.3.2 Level setting ..................................................... 7-7
7.3.3 Measure ............................................................ 7-9
7.3.4 Accessory ....................................................... 7-10
7.3.5 Power Meter ................................................... 7-11
7.3.6 Aperture Setting.............................................. 7-14
Initialization ................................................................. 7-15
7.4.1 Preset ............................................................. 7-15
7.4.2 Default value list ............................................. 7-15
7
Power Meter
7-1
Chapter 7 Power Meter
7.1 Power Meter
You can connect a USB power sensor to the MS2840A and read the
measurement values.
Preparation
For the setup procedure of the application software for this function,
refer to Section 3.8 “Installing and Uninstalling” and Section 3.5
“Loading, Unloading, and Switching Applications.”
The MS2840A can accept any USB power sensor in the following table,
automatically recognize its model name, and automatically set the COM
Port regardless of the USB Port to which the USB power sensor is
connected.
Table 7.1-1 shows the models and specifications of compatible power
sensors.
Table 7.1-1 USB Power Sensors
Model
Frequency
Resolution
Dynamic Range
MA24104A
MA24105A
MA24106A
MA24108A
MA24118A
MA24126A
600 MHz to 4 GHz
350 MHz to 4 GHz
50 MHz to 6 GHz
10 MHz to 8 GHz
10 MHz to 18 GHz
10 MHz to 26 GHz
1 kHz
100 kHz
1 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
+3 dBm to +51.76 dBm
+3 dBm to +51.76 dBm
–40 dBm to +23 dBm
–40 dBm to +20 dBm
–40 dBm to +20 dBm
–40 dBm to +20 dBm
Follow the procedure below to select a USB power meter function:
<Procedure>
1.
Plug in the USB power sensor connector to the USB port of the
MS2840A Signal Analyzer.
2.
Press
3.
Press the Power Meter function key.
to display the Application Switch function menu.
You can select the application also by clicking the Power Meter icon on
the task bar.
7-2
7.2
Display Description
7.2 Display Description
Press
to display the Application Switch function menu. Then,
select the Power Meter, and you can display the power meter application
main screen and the function menu.
3
1
4
5
2
15
6
7
9
8
10
11
12
13
7
14
Figure 7.2-1 Power meter application main screen
Power Meter
7-3
Chapter 7 Power Meter
Table 7.2-1 Parameters on the power meter application main screen
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
*:
7-4
Display
Power Meter
COMxx
Port
MAxxxxxA
Model
Frequency
Auto
Low
High
Power [dBm]
Relative Power
[dB]
Power [W]
Device Status
Error
Measuring
COM Searching
Stop
Not Zeroed
Zeroed
12
Offset
13
Average
14
Disconnect Info
15
Aperture Mode
Aperture Time
Description
Application software name
The name of the synchronizing application is
displayed in parentheses.
COM Port number (xx) to which the USB
power sensor is connected.
Appears when no USB power sensor is
connected.
Model of the connected USB power sensor.
Appears when no USB power sensor is
connected.
Calibration factor frequency setting.
Input range: Auto
Input range: Low input level
Input range: High input level
Measured power with offset level in dBm
units.
This value is displayed in red in case of a
device status error.
Relative power in dB units.
Measured power with offset level in W units.
Appears in case of a power sensor error.*
Measurement is in progress.
USB power sensor search in progress.
USB power sensor search stopped.
Zeroing not executed.
Zeroing executed.
Sets the offset level value to be added to the
power sensor reading and turns on and off
the offset function.
Current count / Setting count of averaging.
Appears when the Average is turned on.
7.3.5 “Power Meter”
Appears when no power sensor is connected
or the connected power sensor is not
recognized by the mainframe. If the power
sensor is connected, disconnect it from the
USB port and securely connect again.
Valid aperture setting value is displayed.
7.3.6 Aperture Setting
For detailed information on error causes and Error IDs, refer to
Chapter 13-3 “STATUS?” in “USB Power Sensors MA241xxA and
PowerXpert User Guide”
7.3
Function Menu
7.3 Function Menu
Press
when the Power Meter function to display the Power Meter
function menu.
Table 7.3-1 Power Meter function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Frequency
F2
Amplitude
F3
Aperture Setting
F4
Measure
F8
Accessory
Function
Opens the Frequency function menu.
7.3.1 “Setting the frequency”
Opens the Amplitude function menu.
7.3.2 “Level setting”
Opens the Aperture Setting function menu.
7.3.6 Aperture Setting
Opens the Measure function menu.
7.3.3 “Measure”
Opens the Accessory function menu.
7.3.4 “Accessory”
7
Power Meter
7-5
Chapter 7 Power Meter
7.3.1
Setting the frequency
In the Frequency function menu, you can set the calibration factor
frequency of the USB power sensor.
Press
(Frequency) in the Power Meter function menu to display the
Frequency function menu.
Table 7.3.1-1 Frequency function menu
Function
Key
F1
Menu Display
Frequency
Function
Sets the calibration factor frequency of the
power sensor.
Press
(Frequency) in the Frequency function menu or
to
display the Frequency dialog box, and then set the measurement
frequency.
Table 7.3.1-2 USB Power Sensor
Model
Setting range
Resolution
Disconnected
MA24104A
MA24105A
MA24106A
MA24108A
MA24118A
MA24126A
10 MHz to 26 GHz
600 MHz to 4 GHz
350 MHz to 4 GHz
50 MHz to 6 GHz
10 MHz to 8 GHz
10 MHz to 18 GHz
10 MHz to 26 GHz
1 Hz
1 kHz
100 kHz
1 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
100 kHz
Note:
7-6
The values below resolutions are rounded.
7.3
7.3.2
Level setting
Function Menu
Press
(Amplitude) or
in the Power Meter function menu to
display the Amplitude function menu.
Table 7.3.2-1 Amplitude function menu
Function
Key
F1
F7
F8
Setting the range
Menu Display
Range
Offset
(On/Off)
Offset Value
Function
Opens the Range function menu.
Turns on and off the level offset function.
Sets the level offset value.
Press
(Range) in the Amplitude function menu to display the Range
function menu.
You can select the measurement range of the power sensor among Auto,
High, and Low. (High and Low require manually setting.)
Note:
This parameter is always Auto when the model is MA24104A or
MA24106A.
Table 7.3.2-2 Range function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
Auto
F2
Low
F3
High
Automatic setting (Default)
When the model is MA24108A, MA24118A, or
MA24126A:
Input range:–40 dBm to –7 dBm
When the model is MA24105A:
Input range: +3 dBm to +38 dBm
When the model is MA24108A, MA24118A, or
MA24126A:
Input range:–7 dBm to +20 dBm
When the model is MA24105A:
Input range: +38 dBm to +51.76 dBm
7-7
Power Meter
F1
7
Function
Chapter 7 Power Meter
Setting the level offset
An arbitrary offset value is added to the measurement value, and their
sum is displayed.
(Offset) in the Amplitude function menu to turn on and off the
Press
addition of the offset value.
Offset: Level offset
On
Off
Turns on the addition of the offset value.
Turns off the addition of the offset value (Default).
(Offset Value) in the Amplitude function menu to display the
Press
Offset Value dialog box, and then set the offset value.
Offset Value:
Setting range and minimum resolution of level offset
Setting range –100.00 to 100.00 dB
Resolution
0.01 dB
Default
0.00 dB
When this function is used, the displayed power sensor value is offset
with the value specified in the Offset Value dialog box. It is used when
the path loss or gain from the MS2840A to DUT is corrected.
[Power sensor reading after offset]
= [Power sensor reading] + [Offset level]
RF output level
–45.3 dBm
DUT
Power sensor
Path to be corrected
such as cables
USB
(Att:1.7 dB)
Offset level
1.7 dB
MS2840A
Power sensor
reading
–47 dBm
Power sensor reading
(after offset)
–45.3 dBm
Figure 7.3.2-1 Summary of offset level
7-8
7.3
7.3.3
Function Menu
Measure
Press
(Measure) or
in the Power Meter function menu to
display the Measure function menu.
The Measure function menu items depend on whether the Power Meter
application synchronizes with the other application or not.
When not synchronizing with any applications
Table 7.3.3-1 Measure function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Power Meter
Function
Opens the Power Meter function menu.
7.3.5 “Power Meter”
When synchronizing with the application
Table 7.3.3-2 Measure function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Modulation Analysis
F2
Power Meter
Application synchronization
Function
Displays the application software that is
synchronizing.
Opens the Power Meter function menu.
7.3.5 “Power Meter”
Table 7.3.3-3 Items to be synchronized between applications
Application
Software
Frequency
Vector Modulation
Offset
Analysis
Offset Value
Items to be synchronized
Frequency
On/off state of the level offset function
Level offset value
When the application synchronization is enabled, the title bar displays
“Power Meter (Application name).”
7-9
7
Power Meter
Application synchronization refers to a state in which the Power Meter
application is selected in the Measure function menu of the other
measurement application software. In this case, the parameters such as
Frequency are shared between 2 applications and do not require setting
again when switching the applications.
Chapter 7 Power Meter
7.3.4
Accessory
Press
(Accessory) in the Power Meter function menu to display the
Accessory function menu.
Table 7.3.4-1 Accessory function menu
Function
Key
Setting the title
Menu Display
F1
Title
F2
Title (On/Off)
Function
Sets the title character string.
Turns on and off the title character
string display.
A title consisting of up to 32 characters can be displayed on the screen.
(Up to 17 characters can be displayed on the top of the function menu.
The maximum character length depends on characters.)
<Procedure>
1.
Press
(Accessory) in the Power Meter function menu.
2.
Press
(Title) to display the character string input dialog box.
Use the rotary knob to select the characters, and press
them. When the title is entered, press
3.
7-10
Press
off.
to enter
(Set).
(Title On/Off) to select Off, and the title display is turned
7.3
7.3.5
Power Meter
Press
or
Function Menu
(Power Meter) in the Measure function menu.
In the Power Meter menu, you can set the measurement that is
performed by using the USB power sensor.
Table 7.3.5-1 Power Meter function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Average
F2
Average Count
F3
Set Reference
F6
Zero Sensor
F8
Back To Application
Averaging
Function
Turns on and off the function of averaging the
measurement results.
Sets the number of times the measurement
results are averaged.
Sets the “measurement value after offset and
averaging” as the reference level of the relative
power.
Executes the zeroing of the USB power sensor.
Appears only during application
synchronization.
Activates the synchronizing measurement
application software.
Press
(Average) in the Power Meter function menu to turn on and
off the averaging function.
Average: Turns on and off the function of averaging .
Turns on the averaging function.
Turns off the averaging function (Default).
(Average Count) in the Power Meter function menu to display
Press
the Average Count dialog box, and then set the number of averaging
times.
Averaging Count: Sets the number of averaging times.
Setting range 2 to 1000
Resolution
1
Default
10
Setting the reference level
(Set Reference) in the Power Meter function menu to set the
Press
“measurement value after offset and averaging” as the reference level of
the relative power.
7-11
Power Meter
On
Off
7
Chapter 7 Power Meter
Zeroing the USB power sensor
(Zero Sensor) in the Power Meter function menu to execute
Press
the zeroing.
When you execute the function, a progress dialog box appears.
Please do not operate the MS2840A during the zeroing.
Figure 7.3.5-1 “Power Meter zeroing” dialog box (Progress)
If the zeroing fails, the following dialog box appears.
Figure 7.3.5-2 “Power Meter zeroing” dialog box (Zeroing failed)
7-12
7.3
Function Menu
Zeroing the power sensor
<Procedure>
1. Plug in the USB power sensor connector to the USB port of the
MS2840A Signal Analyzer.
2. Turn off the RF output of DUT (device under test) in advance.
Connect the RF Input connector of the power sensor to the RF output
terminal of DUT.
CAUTION
Avoid excessive input levels when connecting the power
sensor to DUT(device under test). The power sensor may
be damaged depending on output levels of DUT.
3.
Execute the Zero Sensor menu.
Activating the synchronizing application
(Back To Application) in the Power Meter function menu to
Press
return to the synchronizing application software.
7
Power Meter
7-13
Chapter 7 Power Meter
7.3.6
Aperture Setting
Press
(Aperture Setting) in the Power Meter function menu to
display the Aperture Setting menu.
Refer to the “Aperture Time” section and the “Measurement
Considerations” section of your power sensor chapter in “USB Power
Sensors MA241xxA and PowerXpert User Guide” for more details.
Table 7.3.6-1 Aperture Setting function menu
Function
Key
Menu Display
F1
Aperture Time
F2
Aperture Mode
Function
Sets the Aperture Time.
Available when
MA24108A/MA24118A/MA24126A is connected.
Sets the Aperture Mode.
Available when MA24104A/MA24106A is
connected.
The table below shows the ranges, resolutions, and defaults for Aperture
Time.
Table 7.3.6-2 Aperture Time
Model
Range
Resolution
Default
Disconnected
---
---
---
MA24104A
MA24105A
MA24106A
MA24108A
MA24118A
MA24126A
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
0.01 to 300.00 ms
0.01 to 300.00 ms
0.01 to 300.00 ms
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
0.01 ms
0.01 ms
0.01 ms
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
20.00 ms
20.00 ms
20.00 ms
The table below shows the options and defaults for Aperture Mode.
Table 7.3.6-3 Aperture Mode
7-14
Model
Options
Default
Disconnected
---
---
MA24104A
MA24105A
MA24106A
MA24108A
MA24118A
MA24126A
LAT, HAT
Disabled
LAT, HAT
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
LAT
Disabled
LAT
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
7.4
Initialization
7.4 Initialization
7.4.1
Preset
7.4.2
Default value list
Power Meter function is a kind of application. For the presetting
procedure, refer to Section 3.7.1 “Preset.”
This section lists the default values of the Power Meter function.
Frequency
1 GHz
Level Offset State
Off
Level Offset Value
0.00 dB
Average State
Off
Average Count
10
Reference Level
0.00 dBm
Reference Level Set
Off
Range
Auto
Sensor Connected
Disconnected
Sensor Model
Disconnected
Aperture
LAT
(MA24104A, MA24106A)
20.00 ms (MA24108A, MA24118A,
MA24126A)
7
Power Meter
7-15
Chapter 7 Power Meter
7-16.
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
This chapter describes the operation methods for the BER measurement
function of the MS2840A-026/126.
Note:
This application is available only when MS2840A-026/126 is
installed.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
Outline of BER Measurement ....................................... 8-2
Display Description ....................................................... 8-5
BER Measurement Function Menu............................... 8-9
Connecting MS2840A-026/126 to External System ... 8-11
Performing BER Measurement ................................... 8-12
Setting Automatic Resynchronization Function .......... 8-22
Setting Input Interface ................................................. 8-27
Setting PN_Fix Pattern ............................................... 8-28
Setting User-defined Pattern ...................................... 8-34
Description of BER Measurement Operation ............. 8-42
8
BER Measurement Function
8-1
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
8.1 Outline of BER Measurement
The MS2840A-026/126 can measure the bit error rate (BER) of signals
incoming from external systems. By pressing the Application Switch
and then BER Test, the MS2840A-026/126 can be switched to BER
measurement mode.
Figure 8.1-1 BER function main screen
Features of the MS2840A-026/126 BER measurement function are as
listed below:
Input signals
Data, Clock, Enable
(Polarity inversion is enabled.)
Input level
TTL level
Measurement bit rate
100 bps to 10 Mbps
8-2
8.1
Outline of BER Measurement
Measured pattern
PN9, PN11, PN15, PN20, PN23, ALL0, ALL1, repetition of 01,
PN9Fix, PN11Fix, PN15Fix, PN20Fix, PN23Fix,
and user-defined patterns
Measurement bit count
1000 to 4294967295 bits (232  1 bits)
Measurement error bit count
1 to 2147483647 bits (231  1 bits)
The maximum value that can be set as the measurement error bit count
is (231  1 bits). If Count Mode is set to Data, however, counting of the
error bit count will continue even if (231  1 bits) is exceeded.
Operation modes
Auto Resync:
Measure Mode:
Count Mode:
On, Off
Continuous, Single, Endless
Data, Error
Synchronization conditions
Depends on the measurement pattern.
PN 9, 11, 15, 20, 23:
No errors occur for (PN stage count  2)
consecutive bits
ALL0, ALL1, repetition of 01: No errors occur for 10 consecutive bits
PN_Fix pattern:
See Section 8.1.8.
User-defined pattern:
No errors occur during the period that is
set for synchronization judgment
8
BER Measurement Function
8-3
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Synchronization probability
The condition required for MS2840A-026/126 to synchronize with a PN
signal is that no error occurs for (PN stage count  2) consecutive bits.
The table below lists the probabilities that no error will occur for (PN
stage count  2) consecutive bits for a PN signal that includes random
errors. These probabilities thus can be referred to as the probabilities
that the MS2840A-026/126 synchronizes with a PN signal at a certain
error rate in one cycle.
Table 8.1-1 Probabilities that MS2840A-026/126 synchronizes with PN
signal
PN stage counts
Error rate
of PN signal (%)
10
3
1
0.1
PN9
PN15
PN23
15.0
57.8
83.5
98.2
4.2
40.1
74.0
97.0
0.79
24.6
63.0
95.5
SyncLoss detection condition
The SyncLoss detection condition can be changed. However, SyncLoss
detection is not executed if Auto Resync is set to Off.
8-4
8.2
Display Description
8.2 Display Description
This section describes the BER measurement function display items.
[2] Count Mode
[1] Data Type
[3] Measure Mode
[4] Status
[5] Error
[6] SyncLoss Count
[7] Error Rate
[8] Error Count
[9] Measured bit
Figure 8.2-1 BER main screen
8
BER Measurement Function
8-5
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Table 8.2-1 Display items in BER measurement mode
No.
8-6
Display
[1]
Data Type
[2]
Count Mode
[3]
Measure Mode
Description
Displays the names of data selected on the list
selection popup screen. Characters cannot be
directly entered. Displays the data set on the
data input screen.
When User Pattern is selected in the data
settings, parameters related to the loaded User
Pattern are displayed.
1) Pattern File
Displays the name of the loaded User Pattern.
2) Bit Length
Displays the length (bit count) of the loaded
User Pattern.
3) Sync Position Start
Displays the bit at which synchronization of
the User Pattern will be started.
4) Sync Position Length
Displays the length (bit count) which is
compared when synchronizing the User
Pattern.
Characters cannot be directly entered.
The
count mode set in the setup screen will be
displayed.
1) Count Mode
Displays the count mode set on the input
screen.
2) Bit length
Displays the bit length of Data and Error set
on the input screen.
Displays the measurement mode selected in the
list selection popup screen. Characters cannot
be directly entered. Displays the data set in the
data setup screen.
8.2
Display Description
Table 8.2-2 Display items in Measure Information area
No.
Display
[4]
Status
[5]
Error
[6]
SyncLoss Count
Description
Displays Stop, Synchronizing, and Measuring.
These messages light up when the following
errors occur.
BitError:
Error bit occurrence
SyncLoss:
SyncLoss occurrence
ClockError:
Input clock signal failure
EnableError: Input enable signal failure
Displays OverflowDataCount or
OverflowSyncLoss when the following errors
occur.
OverflowDataCount: The number of received
bits exceeds the
maximum value (232  1
bits).
OverflowSyncLoss:
The number of SyncLoss
errors exceeds the
maximum value (65535).
Displays the number of SyncLoss errors.
8
BER Measurement Function
8-7
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Table 8.2-3 Error rate display
No.
[7]
[8]
[9]
Display
Error Rate
Error Count
Bit
Description
Displays the error rate.
Displays the error count.
Displays the number of measured bits.
Error Rate display
Error Rate may be displayed in either floating-point form or fixed-point
percentage, which complies with the following rules:
 Floating-point display
Rounding down to the 1/10000th digit from the maximum significant
value, the digits up to the 1/1000th digit are displayed.
Example:
For 0.00978495
 Displayed as 9.785E-003.
 Fixed-point percentage display
The value is displayed in percentage. With the fourth digit of the
fraction part rounded, the digits down to the third digit of the fraction
part are displayed.
Example:
For 0.00978495
 Displayed as 0.978%.
If BER measurement has not yet been performed, the error rate, error
count, and received bits count are all displayed as 0.
8-8
8.3
BER Measurement Function Menu
8.3 BER Measurement Function Menu
This section describes the main function menu on the BER measurement
screen.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Page 1
Page 2
Figure 8.3-1 Main function menu
8
BER Measurement Function
8-9
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Table 8.3-1 Top function menu
Menu Display
Measure
Start
Measure
Stop
Count Clear
Data Type
Measure Mode
Count Mode
Resync
Condition
BER
Interface
PN_Fix
Pattern
User Defined
Pattern
8-10
Function
Starts BER measurement.
8.5 “Performing BER Measurement”
Stops BER measurement.
8.5 “Performing BER Measurement”
Clears the count operation.
8.5 “Performing BER Measurement”
Selects the data type.
8.5 “Performing BER Measurement”
Selects the BER measurement mode.
8.5 “Performing BER Measurement”
Selects the measurement termination condition
and specifies the bit count.
8.5 “Performing BER Measurement”
Sets the automatic resynchronization function.
8.6 “Setting Automatic Resynchronization
Function”
Performs settings related to the BER
measurement interface.
8.7 “Setting Input Interface”
Sets PN fix.
8.8 “Setting PN_Fix Pattern”
Displays the Pattern Load function menu.
8.9 “Setting User-defined Pattern”
8.4
Connecting MS2840A-026/126 to External System
8.4 Connecting MS2840A-026/126 to External System
To perform BER measurement, signals must be input from an external
system. Signals can be input from the AUX connector on the rear panel.
Details of BER signal input
The following are signal pins used for BER measurement.
 BER_CLK
 BER_DATA
 BER_EN
Inputs a clock signal that is generated in sync
with data.
Inputs the data signal.
Inputs the gate (enable) signal.
Refer to Table 3.1.1-1 “AUX Connector” for details on pin assignment.
Figure 8.4-1 Input connector
If the enable signal is not used, set “Enable Active” to “Disable.”
Change the settings of the MS2840A-026/126 in accordance with the
specifications of the input signal.
8.7 “Setting Input Interface”
8
BER Measurement Function
8-11
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
8.5 Performing BER Measurement
This function performs various BER measurement settings, and executes
the measurement.
BER measurement
<Procedure>
1.
Input the signals from the external system according to the
instructions in Section 8.4 “Connecting MS2840A-026/126 to
External System.”
2.
Select the data type. Press
(Data Type) to display the Data
Type selection window. Move the cursor to the pattern to be used
for the measurement and press
(Set) to select a pattern.
Figure 8.5-1 Data Type selection window
The following patterns can be selected.
PN9, PN11, PN15, PN20, PN23,
PN9Fix, PN11Fix, PN15Fix, PN20Fix, PN23Fix,
ALL0, ALL1, ALT(0/1), UserDefine
ALT(0/1) indicates a repetition pattern of 0 and 1.
For details on PN_Fix and UserDefine, refer to the following sections
respectively:
8.8 “Setting PN_Fix Pattern”
8.9 “Setting User-defined Pattern”
8-12
8.5
3.
Performing BER Measurement
Select BER measure mode. Press
(Measure Mode) to display
the Measurement Mode selection window. Move the cursor to the
desired measurement mode and press
(Set) to select it.
One of the following three types can be selected for the measurement
mode:
Continuous
Single
Endless
Performs the measurement continuously for the
set bit count or set error bit count.
Performs the measurement for the set bit count
or set error bit count.
Performs the measurement for 4294967295 bits.
Figure 8.5-2 Measure Mode selection window
8
BER Measurement Function
8-13
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
When “Endless” is selected for the measurement mode, the count mode
(Count Mode), data bit (Data), and the display of error bit (Error)
setting items is darkened.
Figure 8.5-3 When Single or Continuous is selected
Figure 8.5-4 When Endless is selected
8-14
8.5
4.
Performing BER Measurement
Select the measurement termination condition.
This item cannot be set when Endless is selected.
Press
(Count Mode) to display the Measurement termination
condition setup window.
Move the cursor to the desired
measurement termination condition and press
(Set) to select it.
Either of the following two types can be selected for the
measurement termination condition:
Data
Error
Specify measurement bit count.  Go to Step 5.
Specify measurement error bit count.  Go to Step 6.
Figure 8.5-5 Measurement termination condition selection window
5.
8-15
8
BER Measurement Function
Set the measurement bit count.
This item cannot be set when Endless is selected.
When Count Mode is set to Data, the value in Data Bit can be
changed. Set the measurement bit count using the numeric keypad,
. Then press
(Set) to set the
rotary knob, or
measurement bit count. The measurement is stopped when the
accumulated measurement bit count reaches the set bit count.  Go
to Step 7.
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Figure 8.5-6 Measurement bit count setup window
Measurement bit count setting range: 1000 to 4294967295 bits
6.
Set the measurement error bit count.
This item cannot be set when Endless is selected.
When Count Mode is set to Error, the value in Error Bit can be
changed. Specify the measurement error bit count using the
. Then press
(Set)
numeric keypad, rotary knob, or
to count the measurement error bit count. The measurement is
stopped when the accumulated measurement error bit count reaches
the set bit count.
Figure 8.5-7 Measurement error bit count setup window
Measurement error bit count setting range:
8-16
1 to 2147483647 bits
8.5
7.
Performing BER Measurement
Configure settings for the automatic resynchronization function.
The automatic resynchronization function can be enabled/disabled
and the SyncLoss error judgment condition can be set.
Refer to the following section for details on the settings.
8.6 “Setting Automatic Resynchronization Function”
8.
Press the
(Measure Start) panel key to start BER measurement.
If
(Measure Stop) is pressed while BER measurement is in
progress, the operation is stopped.
Operation termination conditions differ depending on the operation
mode.
Press
mode.
to perform BER measurement in Single measurement
Press
to perform BER measurement in Continuous
measurement mode. If measurement is started using these panel
keys, the BER measurement mode settings will be switched
automatically.
Table 8.5-1 Operation termination conditions for BER measurement
(Single measurement mode)
Auto
Resync
On
Off
Count Mode
Data
Measurement is stopped when setting parameters (except for BER
Interface).
If a condition listed in Table 8.5-1 above is met in the Continuous
measurement mode, measurement is stopped once and then started
again.
8-17
8
BER Measurement Function
Error
 The set measurement
bit count is reached.
 The set measurement
 The SyncLoss count
bit count is reached.
reaches the maximum
value (65535).
 The set measurement
error bit count is
 The set measurement
reached.
error bit count is
 The measurement bit
reached.
count reaches the
The measurement bit

maximum value (232 
count reaches the
1 bits).
maximum value (232 
 The SyncLoss count
1 bits).
reaches the maximum
value (65535).
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Measurement continues even if the view moves to another screen
while BER measurement is in progress.
If the power is turned off while BER measurement is in progress, the
measurement will remain stopped.
When measurement is started with a 10 Mbps signal, the upper
limit of the measurement bit count is reached about 430 seconds
(max.) later, and measurement is stopped.
BER measurement will be stopped if any of the following operations
is performed when the MS2840A-077/177 Analysis Bandwidth
Extension to 62.5 MHz, or MS2840A-078/178 Analysis Bandwidth
Extension to 125 MHz is installed in the MS2840A.
 Switching the frequency span of the signal analyzer function to
31.25 MHz or less (lower) and to 50 MHz or more (upper).
 Switching the application to/from the spectrum analyzer function
when the frequency span of the signal analyzer is set to 50 MHz or
more.
 Switching the application to/from measurement software when the
frequency span of the signal analyzer is set to 50 MHz or more.
8-18
8.5
Performing BER Measurement
Display in each BER measurement mode
The following figures show the difference in the measurement display
among BER measurement modes. For the progress state and error rate
display during measurement, see Figure 8.2-1 “BER main screen”.
Measurement Mode: Continuous
The Measured result is not updated during measurement. When the
measurement is completed, the measured result is updated and the
measurement then starts again.
Measurement starts.
Event
Measurement stops.
Measurement restarts.
During measurement
Measurement stops.
During measurement
Count display,
Error rate display
Display is not updated.
0 clear
Display is not updated.
Measurement results are updated.
Display is
not updated.
Measurement results are updated.
Figure 8.5-8 Measure Mode Continuous
Measure Mode: Single and Endless
The received bit count, error bit count, error rate are updated as needed
during measurement. When the measurement is completed, the display
update is stopped.
Measurement stops.
BER Measurement Function
Measurement starts.
During measurement
Count display,
Error rate display
Display is successively updated.
8
Display is not updated.
0 clear
Figure 8.5-9 Measure Mode: Single and Endless
8-19
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Note:
The measurement results may not be displayed correctly when
“synchronizing” and “measuring” appear in the Status field
alternately and repeatedly. In that case, check the settings and
input signals and restart the measurement.
Count Clear operation
(Count Clear) is pressed is described below.
The operation when
The Count Clear operation is disabled when Continuous is selected for
the measurement mode.
During measurement (Synchronizing or Measuring):
The received bit count, error rate, and SyncLoss count are cleared during
measurement while the synchronization state is held. Therefore, if
Count Clear is executed during measurement, the received bit count at
the end of measurement is smaller than the set measurement bit count.
The same applies to the error bit count.
Example: Display when Count Clear is pressed when measuring 100000 bits
[1] Start the measurement.
Measurement ends.
Measurement starts.
Received bit display
35612 bits
[2]
Press Count Clear. The count bit count when the switch is pressed
is 35612, however the display is 0 bits.
Measurement starts.
Count Clear is
pressed.
Measurement ends.
Received bit display
0 bits
[3]
8-20
The total count bit count is 100000 bits upon measurement
completion, however the display is 64388 bits (100000  35612).
8.5
Measurement starts.
Performing BER Measurement
Measurement ends.
Received bit display
64388 bits
Figure 8.5-10 Count Clear operation
When measurement is stopped (Stop):
The received bit count, error rate, and progress state displays are
cleared.
8
BER Measurement Function
8-21
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
8.6 Setting Automatic Resynchronization Function
This section describes the settings for the automatic resynchronization
function of BER measurement.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 8.6-1 Resync Condition setup screen
Setting procedure for automatic resynchronization function
(Resync Condition) from page 2 of the main function menu to
Press
perform various settings for the automatic resynchronization function of
BER measurement. Use the cursor to select the item to be set and press
(Set) to display the setting window associated with that item.
The following items can be set in this menu.
[1] Auto Resync
Sets the resynchronization operation when SyncLoss occurs.
On SyncLoss is detected. Resynchronization is automatically
performed when SyncLoss occurs.
Off SyncLoss is not detected.
The following items are enabled only when Auto Resync is set to On.
[2] Threshold
Sets the SyncLoss detection conditions. When X bits out of Y bits
are errors, it is judged as SyncLoss. The values of X and Y can be
set here.
Setting range of X (numerator):
1 to (Y/2) bits
Setting range of Y (denominator):
500, 5000, 50000 bits
Any value within the setting range can be set for X, while one of the
three preset value should be set for Y.
8-22
8.6
Setting Automatic Resynchronization Function
[3] at SyncLoss
Sets whether to clear the measurement bit count when SyncLoss
occurs.
Count Clear
Clears the measurement bit count to 0.
Count Keep
Retains the measurement bit count.
Details of Auto Resync
The difference in operation when Auto Resync is set to On and Off is
described below.
Auto Resync On
If the number of occurred errors exceeds the set Threshold value when
synchronization is established, it is judged as SyncLoss, the
measurement is stopped, and resynchronization is executed. When
Threshold is set to 200/500 (default) and the number of error bits out of
500 bits is 200 or less, measurement can be performed without SyncLoss
being detected.
When measuring a signal with a high error rate, a high Threshold value,
such as 200/500, can be set to suppress the detection of SyncLoss when
block errors occur due to phasing.
When measuring a signal with a low error rate, a low Threshold setting,
such as 50/500, can be set to enable resynchronization by quickly
detecting SyncLoss when errors occur.
Auto Resync Off
The correspondence between the error rate of the measurement target
and the recommended setting is shown in the table below.
8-23
8
BER Measurement Function
SyncLoss is not detected during measurement. When a signal with a
high error rate is measured, the measurement is performed without
interruption with this setting. Note, however, that the clock and data
may be out of synchronization when the clock is not regenerated on the
DUT side. In such a case, set Auto Resync to On for measurement.
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Table 8.6-1 Error rate of measurement target and recommended setting
AutoResync
On
Settings
Error Rate of
Measurement target
Lower than 0.3%
0.3% or Higher
Optimum:
Applicable:
Not recommended:
AutoResync
Off
Threshold
value:
50/500
Threshold
value:
200/500
Optimum
Not
recommended
Applicable
Applicable
Optimum
Applicable
Most suitable setting
Measurement is possible with this setting.
SyncLoss may occur frequently with this setting.
Reference:
Default Threshold value of the MG3710A:
200/500
Threshold setting value of the MP1201C:
200/512
Default Threshold value of the MD6420A:
200/512
Threshold setting value of the MT8820C (WCDMA) BER function:
23/64
The differences between the Auto Resync operation supported in the
MS2840A and the Auto Sync operation supported in the MP1201C and
MD6420A are described below.
Details of Auto Resync operation
The details of the Auto Resync operation supported in the MS2840A are
as follows.
Auto Resync On
Synchronization is executed at the start of measurement, and the
measurement is started when synchronization is established.
If
SyncLoss is detected during measurement, resynchronization is
automatically executed.
Measurement
starts.
Synchronization
is established.
Synchronizing
SyncLoss is
detected.
Measuring
Synchronization
is established.
Resynchronizing
Figure 8.6-2 Auto Resync On
8-24
Measuring
8.6
Setting Automatic Resynchronization Function
Auto Resync Off
Synchronization is executed at the start of measurement, and the
measurement is started when synchronization is established. SyncLoss
is not detected during measurement.
Measurement
starts.
Synchronization
is established.
Synchronizing
Measuring
Figure 8.6-3 Auto Resync Off
Details of Auto Sync operation
The Auto Sync operation supported in the MP1201C and MD6420A is as
follows.
Auto Sync On
Synchronization is executed at the start of measurement, and the
measurement is started when synchronization is established.
If
SyncLoss is detected during measurement, resynchronization is
automatically executed.
Measurement
starts.
Synchronization
is established.
SyncLoss is
detected.
Synchronization
is established.
8
Synchronizing
Measuring
Resynchronizing
Measuring
BER Measurement Function
Figure 8.6-4 Auto Sync On
8-25
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Auto Sync Off
Measurement is performed on the assumption that synchronization is
established at the start of measurement. SyncLoss is not detected
during measurement.
Starts
measurement.
Measuring
Figure 8.6-5 Auto Sync Off
Note:
To obtain a BER curve, set Auto Sync to On so as to establish
synchronization with superior S/N, and then switch Auto Sync to
Off to change S/N and start the measurement.
8-26
8.7
Setting Input Interface
8.7 Setting Input Interface
This section describes the settings of the input interface used for BER
measurement. BER measurement will not stop even if this setting is
changed.
Figure 8.7-1 Input interface setup screen
Input interface setting procedure
Press
(BER Interface) from page 2 of the main function menu to set
the input interface to be used for BER measurement. Use the cursor to
select the item to be set and press
(Set) to display the setting
window associated with that item. The settings for the input interface
can be configured while continuing measurement.
The following items can be set in this menu.
 Data Polarity (Positive/Negative)
Switches the logic of the Data signal between positive and negative
logic.
 Enable Active (Disable/High/Low)
Switches the logic of the Enable signal between unused, high active,
and low active.
8-27
8
BER Measurement Function
 Clock Edge (Rise/Fall)
Switches the Clock signal detection edge between rising-edge detection
and falling-edge detection.
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
8.8 Setting PN_Fix Pattern
Special PN patterns called PN_Fix patterns can be used for BER
measurement.
Details of PN_Fix pattern
A PN_Fix pattern consists of a repetitive part of a PN pattern and a PN
pattern shorter than one period.
N repetitions of PNx
PNx
(2x  1 bits)
(N = 0, 1, 2, …)
PNx
(2x  1 bits)
…
Incomplete PNx
(y bits)
PN_Fix pattern length
= (2x  1)  N + y bits
x: PN stage count
N: PNx repetition times
Figure 8.8-1 PN_Fix pattern
PN_Fix pattern setting procedure
To use a PN_Fix pattern, one of the following PN Fix patterns must be
selected via Data Type selection.
PN9Fix, PN11Fix, PN15Fix, PN20Fix, PN23Fix
(PN_Fix Pattern) from
After the PN Type has been selected, press
page 2 of the main function menu to enable detailed settings for PN_Fix.
Use the cursor to select the item to be set and set a value. The following
items can be set in this menu.
8-28
8.8
Setting PN_Fix Pattern
[1] PN Pattern Initial
Sets the initial bit pattern of the PN_Fix pattern.
Figure 8.8-2 PN Pattern Initial setup screen
1.
Enter the initial bit pattern of the PN_Fix pattern. Enter the
initial bit pattern in binary. Use the numeric key pad (only 0 and 1)
to enter numeric values.
2.
The settable bit count varies depending on the selected PN type:
PN9Fix:
9 bits
PN11Fix:
11 bits
PN15Fix:
15 bits
PN20Fix:
20 bits
PN23Fix:
23 bits
[2] PN_Fix Pattern Length
Specifies the length of the entire PN_Fix pattern.
8
BER Measurement Function
Figure 8.8-3 PN_Fix Pattern Length setup screen
8-29
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Setting range:
96 to 134217728 bits
<Note on setting PN_Fix>
When the initial value of PN_Fix is set to All0, the following signals
are output:
PN9, PN11, PN20: ALL0 signal
PN15, PN23:
ALL1 signal
Synchronization establishing condition for PN_Fix patterns
The synchronization establishing conditions for the PN_Fix pattern are
described below.
In the description below, x is assumed as “PN stage count” (x = 9 for
PN9).
Synchronization establishment is performed in the following three steps:
[1] Synchronization with the PN pattern is established if no error is
detected for (x  2) bits.
[2] The last bit of the PNxFix pattern is detected from the set initial bit
pattern length of the PN pattern.
[3] Synchronization with the entire PN_Fix pattern is established if no
error is detected for x bits beginning with the head of the PN_Fix
pattern.
An example of synchronization establishment with the PN9Fix
pattern is shown below.
8-30
8.8
Setting PN_Fix Pattern
[1] No error detection for 18 bits
(PN9 synchronization
establishment condition)
Measurement
starts.
PN9
(511 bits)
PN9
(511 bits)
Incomplete PN9
(200 bits)
One cycle of PN9Fix
Discontinuous point
[2] Discontinuous point detection
PN9
(511 bits)
PN9
(511 bits)
Discontinuous point
Incomplete PN9
(200 bits)
PN9
(511 bits)
Incomplete PN9
(200 bits)
[3] No error detection
for 9 bits
PN9Fix synchronization
is established.
Figure 8.8-4 Example of synchronization establishment operation for
PN9Fix pattern
8
BER Measurement Function
8-31
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
PN_Fix pattern use example
A specific example of using a PN_Fix pattern is described below.
The following is described on the assumption that the frame format in a
communication system is configured with fixed bits A (10 bits) and
communication channels B (1000 bits) as shown in Figure 8.8-5 below.
If PN9 is used for the communication channel, the bit count per frame
(1000 bits) does not match the PN9 period (511 bits). In this event,
therefore, a period of 511 frames is required to retain the continuity of
the PN9 signal of the communication channel.
In the case of a signal generator that uses an arbitrary waveform
generator such as the MS2840A, however, the number of patterns that
can be stored in the waveform memory may decrease or exceed the
capacity of the waveform memory if the number of samples of the
waveform pattern becomes larger due to an increase in the number of
frames, as described above.
PN9 signal is discontinuous
PN9 signal is continuous
A: Fixed bit
(10 bits)
B: Communication channel
(1000 bits)
PN9 (511 bits)
1 frame
A: Fixed bit
(10 bits)
PN9 (489 bits)
B: Communication channel
(1000 bits)
PN9 (511 bits)
A: Fixed bit
(10 bits)
PN9 (467 bits)
PN9 (22 bits)
Waveform pattern period = 2 frames
B: Communication channel
(1000 bits)
PN9 (511 bits)
PN signal
returns to
the head.
Figure 8.8-5 PN9Fix pattern example
In such a case, use a signal with a short period, such as a two-frame
period signal generated by IQproducerTM, and select “PNFix” for “Data
Type” (see Figure 8.8-6 below).
BER measurement can then be
performed even for signals whose PN9 signal is discontinued in the
middle of a frame, as shown in Figure 8.8-5 above.
Refer to the operation manual of each IQproducerTM for how to set the
PN_Fix signal for the IQproducerTM.
Note, however, that the random nature of a pseudo random signal may
partially be lost during measurement using a PN_Fix signal.
8-32
8.8
Setting PN_Fix Pattern
Clock,Data,
Enable
DUT
Waveform pattern
(PN_Fix data)
RF signal
Figure 8.8-6 BER measurement using PN_Fix data
8
BER Measurement Function
8-33
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
8.9 Setting User-defined Pattern
The MS2840A-026/126 allows the use of patterns created by the user
(user-defined patterns) for BER measurement.
Details of user-defined pattern files
User-defined patterns are arbitrary binary sequences with 8 to 4096 bit
length.
Arbitrary binary sequence
01010011011000....................................................101
8 to 4096 bits
Figure 8.9-1 User-defined pattern
A user-defined pattern can be created in text file format using a PC.
That file is then loaded from USB memory stick or the internal SSD of
the MS2840A. Create the file as described below and set the extension
as “bpn.”
Table 8.9-1 shows the content that can be described in a user-defined
pattern.
Table 8.9-1 Content that can be described in user-defined pattern
Character
0, 1
Space
Line feed
#
8-34
Description
Single-byte numbers. This portion is read as bit data.
Numbers must be continuous using characters including
spaces and line feeds.
Single-byte space. These are used to make it easier to
view bit data editing.
CR/LF. This character is used to facilitate the view
during bit data editing.
Single-byte sharp. Indicates comment lines.
8.9
Setting User-defined Pattern
The following shows examples of file content that can be loaded.
Example 1:
#20070216 Marked by Anritsu Co.
0010 0111 0110 0011 0000 1111 0101
Example 2:
#UserPattern Start
0000 0000 1111 1111
#mark001
0101 0101
#mark002
1111 1111 0000 0000
8
BER Measurement Function
8-35
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Displaying user-defined patterns
To use a user-defined pattern, select UserDefine for Data Type. The
parameters for the loaded user-defined pattern will be displayed on the
main screen. Blanks will be displayed if no user-defined pattern is
loaded.
[1] Pattern File
[2] Bit Length
[3] Sync Position Start
[4] Sync Position Length
Figure 8.9-2 User-defined pattern parameter display
[1] Pattern File
Displays the name of the loaded user pattern.
[2] Bit Length
Displays the length (number of bits) of the loaded user pattern.
[3] Sync Position Start
Displays the bit at which synchronizing the user pattern is to be
started.
[4] Sync Position Length
Displays a length (number of bits) to be compared with when
synchronizing a user pattern.
8-36
8.9
Setting User-defined Pattern
User-defined pattern function menu
(User Defined Pattern)
Select User Pattern for Data Type and press
from page 2 of the main function menu to display the user-defined
pattern file function menu.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Figure 8.9-3 User-defined pattern function menu
Table 8.9-2 User-defined pattern function menu
Menu Display
User Pattern
Detail
Load
User Pattern
Performs settings related for synchronizing
loaded user-defined patterns.
Loads user-defined patterns from the USB
memory stick or the internal SSD of the
MS2840A.
Selects the media among the USB memory stick
and internal SSD from which user-defined
patterns are to be loaded.
8-37
8
BER Measurement Function
Device
Function
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Procedure for loading User-defined patterns
This section describes the procedure for loading user-defined patterns.
<Procedure>
1.
(Device) to select among the USB memory stick and
Press
internal SSD, the device in which user-defined pattern files to be
loaded are stored. Place user-defined pattern files in the root
directory of the device.
Figure 8.9-4 Device selection window
2.
Press
(Load User Pattern) to display the file selection window.
Figure 8.9-5 File selection window
8-38
8.9
Setting User-defined Pattern
3.
Use the rotary knob or
file to be loaded.
to select the user-defined pattern
4.
(Set) to load the selected user-defined pattern files.
Press
If
(Cancel) is pressed, loading of the user-defined pattern file is
cancelled and the file selection window is closed.
Only files with extension “.bpn” are displayed in the file selection
window.
User-defined pattern files must be placed in the root directory of the
USB memory stick or internal SSD.
File names are displayed in ascending order for numbers and
alphabetical characters.
Up to 100 files can be displayed in the file selection window. The
101st and subsequent files will not be displayed.
Up to 32 characters can be used for file names. Files with names
consisting of 33 or more characters cannot be loaded.
If no user-defined pattern file exists in the media, the message “No
file to read” will be displayed.
Either of the following messages will be displayed if the length of the
user-defined pattern is out of the range supported by the
MS2840A-026/126.
If shorter than 8 bits:
“Bit pattern is too short.”
If longer than 4096 bits:
“Bit pattern is too long.”
The error message “Illegal character exists.” will be displayed if the
user-defined pattern file contains a character other than “0,” “1,” a
line feed character, or “#.”
8
BER Measurement Function
8-39
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Synchronization establishing condition setting for user-defined patterns
When the user-defined pattern is loaded, set the conditions for
synchronization establishment.
Set the start bit and the length of the section to be used for judging the
synchronization establishment. If no error is detected in the specified
part, it is judged that synchronization is established.
Section for judgment of synchronization establishment
0101001101100001010101110000.....................101
<2> Length
<1> Start bit
Figure 8.9-6 Setting method for section judged for synchronization
establishment
Example: Setting synchronization for a user-defined pattern
<Procedure>
1.
(User Pattern Detail) from the user-defined pattern
Press
function menu to display the User Pattern Detail setting window.
Figure 8.9-7 User pattern Detail setting window
2.
Move the cursor to Sync Position Start and use the numeric key pad,
to set the start bit of the section judged for
rotary knob, or
synchronization establishment.
Range:
8-40
1 to the length of the user-defined pattern
8.9
3.
Setting User-defined Pattern
Move the cursor to Sync Position Length and use the numeric key
pad, rotary knob, or
to set the length of the section judged
for synchronization establishment.
Range:
8 to 1024
8
BER Measurement Function
8-41
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
8.10 Description of BER Measurement Operation
This section describes the BER measurement
synchronization to measurement termination.
operation,
from
When Auto Resync is set to Off
The following flowchart summarizes BER measurement operation when
Auto Resync is set to Off. In this mode, the error rate is checked
immediately after synchronization in order to judge whether
synchronization is correctly established. If the error rate is 30% or
higher, it is judged as a synchronization failure, and re-synchronization
is executed.
8-42
8.10 Description of BER Measurement Operation
Start of BER measurement
Synchronization
Establishing
*1
synchronization
Synchronization
failure
Display:
Synchronization
Synchronization check
*2
Synchronization
check is passed
Count operation
Display:
Measuring
Condition is not met
(Continuing)
Termination condition
*3
check
Condition is met
(Terminating)
Measurement stop
Display:
Stop
BER Measurement Function
Continuous
Measure Mode
check
8
Single or
Endless
End of BER measurement
Figure 8.10-1 When Auto Resync is set to Off
8-43
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
*1: The error rate is not checked if the measurement is terminated with
a measurement bit count of less than 1000 bits. The measured
values may be incorrect in this event.
*2: If the error rate when the measurement bit count reaches 1000 bits
is 30% or higher, it is judged as a synchronization failure.
*3: The measurement termination conditions are as follows:
 The accumulated measurement bit count or measurement error
bit count reaches the set bit count.
 The measurement bit count exceeds the maximum value.
 The number of SyncLoss errors exceeds the maximum value.
8-44
8.10 Description of BER Measurement Operation
When Auto Resync is set to On
The following flowchart summarizes the BER measurement operation
when Auto Resync is set to On. In this mode, resynchronization is
automatically executed when SyncLoss occurs.
8
BER Measurement Function
8-45
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
Start of BER measurement
Display:
Synchronization
Synchronization
Establishing synchronization
Reception of bits required for
*1
SyncLoss condition check
SyncLoss
check
SyncLoss
OK
*2
Display:
Measuring
Count operation
Condition is not met
(Continuing)
Termination condition
*3
check
Condition is met.
(Terminating)
Measurement stop
Measure Mode
check
Continuous
Single or
Endless
End of BER measurement
Figure 8.10-2 When Auto Resync is set to On
8-46
Display:
Stop
8.10 Description of BER Measurement Operation
*1: The SyncLoss condition check is not executed until the number of
received bits reaches the number of bits set as the denominator of
the SyncLoss threshold set in [Threshold] on the Resync Condition
Setup screen. Therefore, it may take some time to start the count
operation after synchronization is established.
*2: Operation after SyncLoss occurrence is performed according to the
setting specified in “at SyncLoss” on the Resync Condition Setup
screen.
*3: The measurement termination conditions are as follows:
 The accumulated measurement bit count or measurement error
bit count reaches the set bit count.
 The measurement bit count exceeds the maximum value.
 The number of SyncLoss errors exceeds the maximum value.
8
BER Measurement Function
8-47
Chapter 8 BER Measurement Function
8-48.
Chapter 9 Maintenance
This chapter describes cautions related to daily maintenance, storage,
and shipping of the MS2840A, as well as the calibration procedure to be
used as preventive maintenance.
9.1
9.2
9.3
Daily Maintenance and Storage.................................... 9-2
9.1.1 Daily maintenance ............................................ 9-2
9.1.2 Cautions on storage MS2840A
for extended period........................................... 9-3
9.1.3 Storing USB memory stick ............................... 9-3
Repackaging and transporting when returning product ......... 9-4
9.2.1 Repackaging..................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Transporting ..................................................... 9-4
Calibration ..................................................................... 9-5
9.3.1 Calibration ........................................................ 9-5
9.3.2 Instruments used for calibrating MS2840A ...... 9-5
9.3.3 Calibrating frequencies
using frequency counter ................................... 9-6
9
Maintenance
9-1
Chapter 9 Maintenance
9.1 Daily Maintenance and Storage
9.1.1
Daily maintenance
Before daily maintenance of the MS2840A, be sure to turn the power off
and unplug it from the AC outlet.
Panel surface dirt
When surface dirt is noticeable, after the MS2840A has been used in a
dusty environment, or when the MS2840A has not been used for an
extended period of time, wipe its surface with a cloth moistened in
detergent and wrung enough.
Screen surface dirt
If the screen surface is dirty, first wipe it dry with a soft cloth. If the dirt
persists, wipe the surface gently with a cloth dipped in detergent and
wrung enough.
Loose screws
Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten screws.
9-2
9.1
9.1.2
Daily Maintenance and Storage
Cautions on storage MS2840A for extended period
Wipe off dust, fingerprint marks, stains, spots, etc. from the surface of
the MS2840A before storing it. Avoid storing the MS2840A in these
places:
 Places that are exposed to direct sunlight
 Dusty places
 Damp places where condensation may occur on the MS2840A surface
 Places where there the MS2840A may be corroded by active gases
 Places where the MS2840A may be oxidized
 Places having temperatures and relative humidity in the following
ranges:
Temperature:
20C or lower, or 60C or higher
Humidity:
90% or higher
Recommended storage conditions
It is recommended that the MS2840A be stored in a place that meets the
ambient conditions suggested above, plus the following conditions, if it is
not to be used for a long period of time:
 Temperature:
5 to 45C
 Humidity:
40 to 80%
 Little temperature and humidity fluctuations within one day
9.1.3
Storing USB memory stick
Store the USB memory stick at temperatures between 4°C and 53°C and
relative humidity between 8% and 90% (no condensation). Avoid storing
the USB memory stick in places that are:
9
 Dusty or damp
 Close to magnetized items
Maintenance
 Exposed to direct sunlight
 Close to heat sources
9-3
Chapter 9 Maintenance
9.2 Repackaging and transporting when returning product
The following describes cautions on transporting the MS2840A.
9.2.1
Repackaging
Repack the MS2840A in the packing material (box) in which it had been
delivered. If the packing material has been scrapped or damaged, repack
the MS2840A in the following manner:
9.2.2
1.
Wrap the MS2840A in plastic or a similar material.
2.
Procure a corrugated cardboard, wooden, or aluminum box large
enough to pack in cushioning material around the MS2840A.
3.
Place the MS2840A into the box. Then, pack in the cushioning
material around the MS2840A so that the MS2840A does not move
around in the box.
4.
Secure the outside of the box with packaging cord, adhesive tape,
bands, or other such implements.
Transporting
Avoiding as much vibrations as possible and satisfying the recommended
storage conditions is recommended for transporting.
9-4
9.3
Calibration
9.3 Calibration
9.3.1
Calibration
Perform calibration as preventive maintenance to keep the MS2840A's
performance from becoming degraded. Even if the MS2840A is
functioning normally, calibrate it periodically to maintain its
performance.
Calibrating the MS2840A once or twice a year is recommended. If the
MS2840A fails to meet specifications after calibration, contact an Anritsu
Service and Sales office.
CAUTION
Before performing the calibration, allow the MS2840A and
the equipment used for the performance test to warm up at
least 30 minutes to allow them to fully stabilize. For
optimal measuring accuracy, run the MS2840A at the
temperature of 23 ± 5°C), with low AC voltage fluctuation
(100 to 120 Vac or 200 to 240 Vac), in an environment free
from noise, vibration, dust, moisture, and other harmful
ambient conditions.
9.3.2
Instruments used for calibrating MS2840A
Table 9.3.2-1 lists the measuring instruments used to calibrate the
MS2840A.
Table 9.3.2-1 List of measuring instruments for calibration
Name of
Recommended
Device
Frequency counter
Frequency
standard device
Capable of 1 GHz measurement
Capable of outputting 1 GHz
signal
(Resolution: 0.01 Hz or higher)
Standard radio receiver or device
with equivalent capability
(Accuracy: 1  1011 order or
better)
Calibration Items
9
Reference oscillator
frequency accuracy
Reference oscillator
frequency accuracy
Maintenance
Signal generator
Required Performance
Reference oscillator
frequency accuracy
9-5
Chapter 9 Maintenance
9.3.3
Calibrating frequencies using frequency counter
Use a frequency counter to calibrate the reference oscillator frequency.
Use a frequency standard radio signal (signal synchronized with a
standard radio signal or with a rubidium atom standard device) offering
enough accuracy higher than the reference oscillator installed in the
MS2840A.
Table 9.3.3-1 Calibration specifications
Reference Oscillator
Internal reference
oscillator
High Stability
Reference Oscillator*
Aging Rate
Temperature Stability
±1×10–6/year
±2.5×10–6 (0 to 50C)
±1×10–7/year
±2×10–8 (0 to 50C)
*: Only when a high Stability reference oscillator (option 002/102) is
installed.
Calibration procedure
The procedure for calibrating the frequency using a frequency counter is
described below.
Frequency counter MF2412C
Reference signal
10 MHz
Anritsu
Reference In
10 MHz
Input 1
MS2840A
Buffer Out
10 MHz
Signal generator (MG3710A/40A)
Reference In 10 MHz
RF Out 1 GHz
Figure 9.3.3-1 Connections for frequency calibration using frequency counter
9-6
9.3
Calibration
1.
Connect a 10 MHz signal output from the frequency standard device
to the reference signal input connector (Reference In) of frequency
counter.
2.
Connect the reference signal output (Buffer Out) located on the rear
panel of the MS2840A to the reference signal input connector
(Reference In) of Signal Generator.
3.
Connect the RF output connector 1 of signal generator to Input 1
connector of the frequency counter.
4.
Set the frequency of signal generator to 1 GHz for output.
5.
Set the measurement time of the frequency counter to 10 s and
measure frequency.
When the frequency does not match, the MS2840A’s reference oscillator
should be adjusted.*
6.
To achieve synchronization, start the Signal Analyzer or the
(Accessory) from
Spectrum Analyzer application. Then press
the Main function menu of the signal analyzer or the spectrum
analyzer.
7.
Press
8.
From the Reference Clock function menu, press
(Reference
Clock) then input adjustment values. The adjustment value can be
set from 0 to 4095.
9.
In practice, waveforms of the output frequency and reference
frequency cannot be completely matched. Adjust so that frequency
error is as small as possible.
*:
Perform a similar measurement after System Recovery.
Re-adjustment is required when the frequency does not match.
(Reference Clock) from the Accessory function menu.
9
Maintenance
9-7
Chapter 9 Maintenance
9-8.
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Performance Test Result Form
Test
Location
Report No.
Date
Test
person in
charge
Equipment Name: MS2840A Signal Analyzer
Serial No.
Ambient
temperature
°C
Power
frequency
Relative
humidity
%
Remarks
Appendix
Appendix A
A-1
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
 Display Frequency Accuracy
Display frequency accuracy test, only for MS2840A-040/041
Setting example
Center
freq
[Hz]
500 M
1800 M
Frequency
span
[Hz]
Resolution
bandwidth
[Hz]
10 k
200 k
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
100 M
10 k
200 k
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
3600 M
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
1M
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
3M
Minimum
[Hz]
Result
499999962
499999428
499994298
499987998
499973998
499952998
499739998
1799999962
1799999428
1799994298
1799987998
1799973998
1799952998
1792289998
Maximum
[Hz]
500000038
500000572
500005702
500012002
500026002
500047002
500260002
1800000038
1800000572
1800005702
1800012002
1800026002
1800047002
1807710002
Display frequency accuracy test, only for MS2840A-041
Setting example
Center
freq
[Hz]
3000 M
A-2
Frequency
span
[Hz]
10 k
100 k
2M
5M
10 M
100 M
6000 M
Resolution
bandwidth
[Hz]
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
3M
Minimum
[Hz]
2999999962
2999999638
2999994298
2999987998
2999973998
2999784998
2987249998
Result
Maximum
[Hz]
3000000038
3000000362
3000005702
3000012002
3000026002
3000215002
3012750002
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Display frequency accuracy test, only for MS2840A-044/046
Setting example
Center
freq
[Hz]
500 M
2000 M
7150 M
14450 M
Frequency
span
[Hz]
10 k
200 k
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
100 M
10 k
200 k
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
3600 M
10 k
100 k
2M
5M
10 M
100 M
4000 M
10 k
50 k
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
7900 M
Resolution
bandwidth
[Hz]
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
1M
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
3M
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
3M
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
3M
Minimum
[Hz]
499999962
499999428
499994298
499987998
499973998
499952998
499739998
1999999962
1999999428
1999994298
1999987998
1999973998
1999952998
1992289998
7149999962
7149999638
7149994298
7149987998
7149973998
7149784998
7141449998
14449999960
14449999741
14449994296
14449987996
14449973996
14449952996
14433259996
Result
Maximum
[Hz]
500000038
500000572
500005702
500012002
500026002
500047002
500260002
2000000038
2000000572
2000005702
2000012002
2000026002
2000047002
2007710002
7150000038
7150000362
7150005702
7150012002
7150026002
7150215002
7158550002
14450000040
14450000259
14450005704
14450012004
14450026004
14450047004
14466740004
Appendix
Appendix A
A-3
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Display frequency accuracy test, only for MS2840A-044
Setting example
Center
freq
[Hz]
22450 M
13250 M
Frequency
span
[Hz]
Resolution
bandwidth
[Hz]
10 k
200 k
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
8100 M
10 k
200 k
2M
5M
10 M
20 M
26500 M
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
1M
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
3M
Minimum
[Hz]
Result
22449999956
22449999422
22449994292
22449987992
22449973992
22449952992
22432839992
13249999960
13249999426
13249994296
13249987996
13249973996
13249952996
13194199996
Maximum
[Hz]
22449999956
22449999422
22449994292
22449987992
22449973992
22449952992
22432839992
13250000040
13250000574
13250005704
13250012004
13250026004
13250047004
13305800004
Display frequency accuracy test, only for MS2840A-046
Setting example
Center
freq
[Hz]
30250 M
22200 M
A-4
Frequency
span
[Hz]
10 k
100 k
2M
5M
10 M
100 M
23700 M
10 k
100 k
2M
5M
10 M
100 M
44400 M
Resolution
bandwidth
[Hz]
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
3M
300
3k
30 k
30 k
100 k
100 k
3M
Minimum
[Hz]
30249999956
30249999632
30249994292
30249987992
30249973992
30249784992
30200079992
22199999956
22199999632
22199994292
22199987992
22199973992
22199784992
22106609992
Result
Maximum
[Hz]
30250000044
30250000368
30250005708
30250012008
30250026008
30250215008
30299920008
22200000044
22200000368
22200005708
22200012008
22200026008
22200215008
22293390008
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
 Frequency Span Display Accuracy
MS2840A-040/041 frequency span display accuracy test
Settings for MS2840A
Center
Freq
[Hz]
1800 M
3000 M
(MS2840A
-041
only)
RBW
[Hz]
Frequency
Span
[Hz]
300
30 k
100 k
1M
3M
300
30 k
100 k
1M
3M
10 k
1M
10 M
100 M
3600 M
10 k
1M
10M
100 M
6000 M
Measurement
Results
Signal Generator
f1 [Hz]
1799996000
1799600000
1796000000
1760000000
360000000
2999996000
2999600000
2996000000
2960000000
600000000
Min
[%]
f2 [Hz]
1800004000
1800400000
1804000000
1840000000
3240000000
3000004000
3000400000
3004000000
3040000000
5400000000
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
(f2′ − f1′)
/ 0.8
/ SPAN × 100
− 100 [%]
Max
[%]
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
Appendix
Appendix A
A-5
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
MS2840A-044/046 frequency span display accuracy test
Measurement
Results
Settings for MS2840A
Center
Freq
[Hz]
2000 M
RBW
[Hz]
300
30 k
100 k
1M
3M
7150 M
300
30 k
100 k
1M
3M
14450 M
300
30k
100k
1M
3M
MS2840A-044 only
22450M 300
30k
100k
1M
3M
13250M 3M
MS2840A-046 only
30250M
300
30k
100k
1M
3M
22200M
3M
A-6
Frequency
Span
[Hz]
10 k
2M
30 M
400 M
4000 M
10 k
2M
30 M
400 M
6600 M
10k
2M
30M
400M
7900M
10k
2M
30M
400M
8100M
26500M
10k
2M
30M
400M
23500M
43000M
Signal Generator
f1 [Hz]
1999996000
1999200000
1988000000
1840000000
400000000
7149996000
7149200000
7138000000
6990000000
4510000000
14449996000
14449200000
14438000000
14290000000
11290000000
22449996000
22449200000
22438000000
22290000000
19210000000
2900000000
30249996000
30249200000
30238000000
30090000000
20850000000
4440000000
Min
[%]
f2 [Hz]
2000004000
2000800000
2012000000
2160000000
3600000000
7150004000
7150800000
7162000000
7310000000
9790000000
14450004000
14450800000
14462000000
14610000000
17610000000
22450004000
22450800000
22462000000
22610000000
25690000000
24100000000
30250004000
30250800000
30262000000
30410000000
39650000000
39960000000
(f2′ − f1′)
/ 0.8
/ SPAN × 100
− 100 [%]
Max
[%]
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
–0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
+0.2
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
 Single Sideband Noise Level
Settings for MS2840A
Offset
frequency
[Hz]
Frequency
span
[Hz]
Resolution
bandwidth
[Hz]
10 k
100 k
1M
25 k
250 k
2.5 M
1k
10 k
100 k
Video
bandwidth
[Hz]
Result
1
3
3
Maximum
[dBc/Hz]
Uncertainty
[dB]
–123
–123
–135
+0.5
+0.5
+0.5
Maximum
[dBc/Hz]
Uncertainty
[dB]
–122
–133
–133
+0.5
+0.5
+0.5
With MS2840A-066/166, and MS2840A-066/166 active. (SPAN ≤ 1 MHz)
Settings for MS2840A
Offset
frequency
[Hz]
Frequency
span
[Hz]
Resolution
bandwidth
[Hz]
1k
10 k
100 k
2.5 k
25 k
250 k
100
1k
10 k
Video
bandwidth
[Hz]
3
3
3
Result
Appendix
Appendix A
A-7
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
 RF Frequency Characteristics
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-040/041 only)
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off, and without MS2840A-066/166 or
MS2840A-066/166 turned off:
Freq.
[Hz]
Calibration
value
[dBm]
Measured
value
[dBm]
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
500 M
1G
2G
3G
Minimum
[dB]
Result
Measured value –
Calibration value [dB]
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-041 only)
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off:
4G
–1.5
5G
–1.5
6G
–1.5
Maximum
[dB]
Uncertainty
[dB]
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
±0.12
±0.12
±0.10
±0.10
±0.10
±0.10
±0.10
±0.10
±0.10
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-040/041 only)
With MS2840A-008/108 and Preamplifier turned on, and without MS2840A-066/166 or MS2840A-066/166
turned off:
Freq.
[Hz]
50 M
100 M
200 M
500 M
1G
2G
3G
Calibration
value
[dBm]
Measured
value
[dBm]
Minimum
[dB]
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-041 only)
With MS2840A-008/108 and Preamplifier turned on:
4G
–1.8
5G
–1.8
6G
–1.8
A-8
Result
Measured value –
Calibration value [dB]
Maximum
[dB]
Uncertainty
[dB]
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
+1.8
+1.8
+1.8
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046 only)
With MS2840A-008/108 and Preamplifier turned on:
Freq.
[Hz]
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
500 M
1G
2G
3G
4G
5G
6G
Calibration
value [dBm]
Measured
value
[dBm]
Result
Minimum
[dB]
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–1.8
–1.8
–1.8
Measured value –
Calibration value
[dB]
Maximum
[dB]
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+1.8
+1.8
+1.8
Uncertainty
[dB]
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
Appendix
Appendix A
A-9
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046 only)
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and Preamplifier turned on:
Without MS2840A-067/167, with Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off and after Preselector Auto Tune is
done:
Freq.
[Hz]
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
500 M
1G
2G
3G
4G
5G
6G
6.01 G
8G
10 G
12 G
13.5 G
15 G
17 G
20 G
26.5 G
Calibration
value [dBm]
Measured
value
[dBm]
Result
Minimum
[dB]
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–0.65
–1.8
–1.8
–1.8
–1.8
–1.8
–1.8
–1.8
–1.8
–2.5
–2.5
–2.5
–2.5
Measured value –
Calibration value
[dB]
Maximum
[dB]
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+0.65
+1.8
+1.8
+1.8
+1.8
+1.8
+1.8
+1.8
+1.8
+2.5
+2.5
+2.5
+2.5
Uncertainty
[dB]
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.15
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.6
±0.6
±0.6
±0.6
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046 only)
Without MS2840A-068/168 or with Preamplifier turned on:
Without MS2840A-067/167, with Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off and after Preselector Auto Tune is
done:
29 G
–3.0
+3.0
±0.8
33 G
–3.0
+3.0
±0.8
40 G
–3.0
+3.0
±0.8
A-10
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046 only)
Without MS2840A-068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier turned off:
Without MS2840A-067/167, with Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off and after Preselector Auto Tune is
done:
Freq.
[Hz]
10 M
20 M
50 M
100 M
200 M
500 M
1G
2G
3G
4G
5G
6G
6.01 G
8G
10 G
12 G
13.5 G
15 G
17 G
20 G
26.5 G
Calibration
value
[dBm]
Measured
value
[dBm]
Minimum
[dB]
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–0.35
–1.5
–1.5
–1.5
–1.5
–1.5
–1.5
–1.5
–1.5
–2.5
–2.5
–2.5
–2.5
Result
Measured value –
Calibration value [dB]
Maximum
[dB]
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+0.35
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
+2.5
+2.5
+2.5
+2.5
Uncertainty
[dB]
±0.12
±0.12
±0.12
±0.12
±0.12
±0.12
±0.12
±0.12
±0.12
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.3
±0.5
±0.5
±0.5
±0.5
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046 only)
Without MS2840A-068/168 or with Preamplifier turned off:
Without MS2840A-067/167, with Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off and after Preselector Auto Tune is
done:
29 G
–2.5
+2.5
±0.5
33 G
–2.5
+2.5
±0.5
40 G
–2.5
+2.5
±0.5
Appendix
Appendix A
A-11
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
 Display Average Noise Level
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-040/041 only)
Without MS2840A-066/166, without MS2840A-008/108, and Preamplifier turned off:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display Average Noise
Level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
9k
100 k
1M
10 M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
Note:
–120
–134
–144
–150
–153
–151
–149
–146
MS2840A-040: 9 kHz to 3600 MHz
MS2840A-041: 9 kHz to 6000 MHz
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-040/041 only)
Without MS2840A-066/166,
with MS2840A-008/108, and Preamplifier turned on:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
1M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
6000 M
Note:
A-12
MS2840A-040: 100 kHz to 3600 MHz
MS2840A-041: 100 kHz to 6000 MHz
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–156
–166
–165
–164
–161
–161
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-040/041 only)
With MS2840A-066/166, without MS2840A-008/108, and Preamplifier turned off:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
9k
100 k
1M
10 M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
–120
–133
–143
–149
–152
–150
–147
–144
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-040/041 only)
With MS2840A-066/166, with MS2840A-066/166 turned off,
with MS2840A-008/108, and Preamplifier turned on:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
1M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
6000 M
Note:
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–155
–165
–164
–162
–158
–158
Appendix
MS2840A-040: 100 kHz to 3600 MHz
MS2840A-041: 100 kHz to 6000 MHz
Appendix A
A-13
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046 only)
Without MS2840A-067/167/068/168/069/169:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
9k
100 k
1M
10 M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
Note:
A-14
MS2840A-044: 9 kHz to 26500 MHz
MS2840A-046: 9 kHz to 44500 MHz
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–120
–134
–144
–150
–153
–150
–147
–144
–144
–151
–146
–146
–146
–144
–140
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046 only)
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168/069/169 and Preamplifier turned off:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
9k
100 k
1M
10 M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
Note:
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–120
–134
–144
–150
–153
–150
–147
–144
–144
–147
–145
–141
–141
–135
–132
MS2840A-044: 9 kHz to 26500 MHz
MS2840A-046: 9 kHz to 44500 MHz
Appendix
Appendix A
A-15
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044 only)
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-069/169 and Preamplifier turned on:
Center freq
[Hz]
1M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
A-16
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–156
–166
–164
–163
–160
–160
–163
–163
–157
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046 only)
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168 and Preamplifier turned on:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
1M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
–156
–166
–164
–163
–160
–160
–163
–163
–160
–160
–157
–149
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046 only)
With MS2840A-067/167 and without MS2840A-068/168/069/169:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
–145
–141
–141
–135
–132
MS2840A-044: 100 kHz to 26500 MHz
MS2840A-046: 100 kHz to 44500 MHz
Appendix A
Note:
–147
Appendix
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
A-17
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046 only)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168/069/169, and Preamplifier turned off:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
Note:
–142
–140
–136
–136
–131
–128
MS2840A-044: 100 kHz to 26500 MHz
MS2840A-046: 100 kHz to 44500 MHz
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044 only)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-069/169, Preamplifier turned on, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on:
Center freq
[Hz]
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
A-18
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–158
–157
–152
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046 only)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier turned on, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
–161
–161
–156
–152
–151
–143
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044 only)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-069/169, Preamplifier turned on, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
–162
–160
–159
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046 only)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier turned on, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off:
Center freq
[Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–164
A-19
Appendix A
–164
–159
–157
–155
–146
Appendix
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046,MS2840A-019/119 installed)
Without MS2840A-067/167/068/168:
Center freq
[Hz]
9k
100 k
1M
10 M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
A-20
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–120
–134
–144
–150
–153
–150
–147
–144
–144
–150
–149
–146
–146
–142
–137
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046,MS2840A-019/119 installed)
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, and Preamplifier turned off:
Center freq
[Hz]
9k
100 k
1M
10 M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–120
–134
–144
–150
–153
–150
–147
–144
–144
–146
–145
–141
–140
–135
–130
Appendix
Appendix A
A-21
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046,MS2840A-019/119 installed)
Without MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, and Preamplifier turned on:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
1M
30 M
99 M
999 M
1999 M
2399 M
2999 M
3999 M
4999 M
5999 M
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
–156
–166
–164
–163
–160
–160
–163
–163
–160
–159
–156
–149
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046,MS2840A-019/119 installed)
With MS2840A-067/167, without MS2840A-068/168, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on/off:
Center freq
[Hz]
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
A-22
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–147
–145
–141
–140
–135
–129
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046,MS2840A-019/119 installed)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier turned off, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on/off:
Center freq
[Hz]
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
–142
–140
–136
–135
–131
–125
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-044/046,MS2840A-019/119 installed)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier turned on, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned on:
Center freq
[Hz]
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–161
–161
–156
–152
–151
–143
Appendix
Appendix A
A-23
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
Frequency Band Mode: Normal (MS2840A-046,MS2840A-019/119 installed)
With MS2840A-067/167, with MS2840A-068/168, Preamplifier turned on, and
Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off:
Center freq
[Hz]
6001 M
8001 M
9999 M
11499 M
13499 M
18299 M
26499 M
33999 M
39999 M
44499 M
A-24
Display average noise
level [dBm/Hz]
Maximum
[dBm/Hz]
–164
–164
–159
–157
–155
–146
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
 Second Harmonic Wave Distortion
MS2840A-040/041
Without MS2840A-008/108 or with Preamplifier turned off:
Settings for MS2840A
Freq.
[MHz]
51
301
Output
level
[dBm]
Ref_Level
[dBm]
–30
–30
1751
–30
2999
0
Applicable
LPF
–20 SLP–50+
Result
Maximum
[dBc]
[dBc]
(Mixer Input level
= –30 dBm)
–60
Uncertainty
[dB]
+1.5
–20 VLF–400 (+)
–20 VLF–2250 (+)
(2-stage series)
–10 VLF–3000 (+)
(2-stage series)
(Mixer Input level
= –30 dBm)
–65
(Mixer Input level
= –20 dBm)
–80
+1.5
+1.5
+3.0
Appendix
Appendix A
A-25
Appendix A Performance Test Result Form
MS2840A-044/046
Without MS2840A-008/108/068/168/069/169 and without MS2840A-067/167:
Settings for MS2840A
Freq.
[MHz]
Output
level
[dBm]
Ref_Level
[dBm]
Result
Applicable
LPF
51
–30
–20 SLP–50+
301
–30
–20 VLF–400 (+)
1751
–30
2999
0
–20 VLF–2250 (+)
(2-stage series)
–10 VLF–3000 (+)
(2-stage series)
5999
0
6749
0
[dBc]
Maximum [dBc]
[dB]
(Mixer Input level =
–30 dBm)
–60
(Mixer Input level =
–30 dBm)
–65
(Mixer Input level =
–20 dBm)
–80
0 VLF–6000 (+)
(2-stage series)
0 VLF–6700 (+)
(2-stage series)
Uncertainty
(Mixer Input level =
–10 dBm)
–90
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
+3.0
+3.0
+3.0
MS2840A-044/046
With MS2840A-068/168/069/169 or with Preamplifier turned off:
Or, with MS2840A-067/167 and Microwave Preselector Bypass turned off:
Settings for MS2840A
Freq.
[MHz]
51
Output
level
[dBm]
Ref_Level
[dBm]
–30
Result
Applicable
LPF
–20 SLP–50+
301
–30
–20 VLF–400 (+)
1751
–30
2999
0
–20 VLF–2250 (+)
(2-stage series)
–10 VLF–3000 (+)
(2-stage series)
5999
0
6749
0
A-26.
0 VLF–6000 (+)
(2-stage series)
0 VLF–6700 (+)
(2-stage series)
[dBc]
Maximum [dBc]
Uncertainty
[dB]
(Mixer Input level
= –30 dBm)
–60
(Mixer Input level
= –30 dBm)
–65
(Mixer Input level
= –20 dBm)
–80
(Mixer Input level
= –10 dBm)
–70
+1.5
+1.5
+1.5
+3.0
+3.0
+3.0
Appendix B Panel Keys and Keyboard Operations
Table B-1 Correspondences between panel keys and keyboard operations
Panel Key
USB Keyboard
[Preset]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[R]
[Top]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[↑]
[F1]
[F1]
[F2]
[F2]
[F3]
[F3]
[F4]
[F4]
[F5]
[F5]
[F6]
[F6]
[F7]
[F7]
[F8]
[F8]
[Back]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[←]
[More]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[→]
[Trace]
[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[V]
[Measure]
[Ctrl]+[Alt]+[X]
Encoder
[Right rotation]
Mouse wheel
[Scroll for above]
Encoder
[Left rotation]
Mouse wheel
[Scroll for below]
[↑]
[↑]
[→]
[→]
[↓]
[↓]
[←]
[←]
[Enter]
[Enter]
Appendix
Appendix B
B-1
Appendix B Panel Keys and Keyboard Operations
Table B-1 Correspondences between panel keys and keyboard operations (Cont’d)
Panel Key
B-2
USB Keyboard
[0]
[0]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[6]
[6]
[7]
[7]
[8]
[8]
[9]
[9]
[.]
[.]
[+/-]
[-]
[Shift]
[Shift]+
[Cancel]
[Esc]
[BS]
[Back Space]
[Single]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[F1]
[Continuous]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[F2]
[Frequency]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[0]
[Span]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[1]
[Amplitude]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[2]
[Marker]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[3]
[BW]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[4]
[Trigger/Gate]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[5]
[Time/Sweep]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[6]
[Peak Search]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[7]
[Save]
[Ctrl]+[S]
[Recall]
[Ctrl]+[O]
[Copy]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+ [8]
[Cal]
[Ctrl]+[Shift]+[9]
Appendix B Panel Keys and Keyboard Operations
Table B-1 Correspondences between panel keys and keyboard operations (Cont’d)
Panel Key
[SPA]
[SA]
[SG]
[Appli]
Note:
USB Keyboard
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
The figure in [Ctrl]+[Shift]+“figure” cannot be entered by the
numeric keypad.
Appendix
Appendix B
B-3
Appendix B Panel Keys and Keyboard Operations
B-4.
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
It is the customer’s responsibility to purchase, install, and operate
anti-virus software on the MS2840A. Follow the manual of the anti-virus
software you purchased.
This document explains the procedure of virus scanning without
installing any anti-virus software on the MS2840A. Virus scanning can
be performed by assigning the equipment drives to network drives on an
external computer on which anti-virus software is installed.
Even if network drives cannot be scanned using your software, scanning
might be possible by dragging and dropping a network drive onto the
anti-virus software icon in Windows Explorer.
C.1
Connecting External PC to MS2840A ....................... C-3
C.2
Checking IP address of MS2840A ............................. C-3
C.3
Configuring shared settings ....................................... C-4
C.4
Changing the user account for the equipment........... C-5
C.5
Shared Settings for MS2840A ................................... C-8
C.6
Mounting the equipment drives to the external
computer drives ......................................................... C-10
C.7
Scanning for virus ...................................................... C-12
C.8
Unmounting the equipment drives from the external
computer drives ......................................................... C-12
C.9
Making the equipment drives unshared ..................... C-12
Appendix
C.10 Restoring the previous user account setting for
the equipment ............................................................ C-12
C.11 Enabling Simple File Sharing..................................... C-13
Appendix C
C-1
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
Notes:

Be sure to follow the procedure described in this document. If
this procedure is not followed, not only will it not be possible to
check for viruses, but the equipment might become unusable.
If the equipment runs abnormally after removing viruses,
execute system recovery to restore all drives to the factory
default settings. For the procedure, refer to Section 5.3 “System
Recovery Functions”.
After performing system recovery, the firmware might have to
be upgraded to the latest version depending on when the
equipment was released.

C-2
Before using anti-virus software, be sure to check its usage and
the license scope.
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
C.1 Connecting External PC to MS2840A
Connect MS2840A and the external PC with LAN cable.
For details about how to set up the network for the MS2840A, see
Chapter 1 “Basics of Remote Control” in the
MS2690A/MS2691A/MS2692A and MS2830A/MS2840A Signal Analyzer
Operation Manual (Main Frame, Remote Control).
C.2 Checking IP address of MS2840A
If the IP address is automatically assigned upon establishing a DHCP
connection, check the IP address by using the following procedure:
1.
Display the MS2840A desktop.
To display the desktop, right-click anywhere on the screen and select
Show the Desktop.
2.
Display the MS-DOS Prompt. Move a mouse downward on the
MS2840A screen to display the task bar. Select Start > All Programs
> Accessories > Command Prompt.
3.
Enter the following:
Appendix
ipconfig
The assigned IP address displays as shown.
Appendix C
C-3
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
C.3 Configuring shared settings
Simple File Sharing is enabled for the equipment by default. If
authentication is performed by way of a network while Simple File
Sharing is enabled, the accessing user is regarded as having a Guest
account and cannot access important folders and files such as the
Windows folder. To avoid this, use the following procedure to temporarily
disable Simple File Sharing.
1.
Move a mouse downward on the MS2840A screen to display the task
bar. Click Start > Computer.
2.
In Organize menu, click Folder and search options, and click View tab.
3.
Advanced Settings list, turn off Use sharing Wizard (Recommended)
check box.
(2)
(3)
(4)
4.
C-4
Click OK.
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
C.4 Changing the user account for the equipment
This section describes how to change the user account used when the
equipment drives are mounted to network drives.
1.
From the Start menu, click Control Panel.
2.
Click Administrative Tools from the Control Panel.
(2)
3.
Click Computer Management.
(3)
Appendix
Appendix C
C-5
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
4.
In Computer Management tree, click Users under Local Users and
Groups.
(4)
5.
Right click the user account “ANRITSU” to use, and click Set
Password…
(5)
6.
When the message below is shown, click Proceed.
(6)
C-6
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
7.
Type ANRITSU for the password.
(7)
(8)
8.
Confirm and click OK.
Appendix
Appendix C
C-7
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
C.5 Shared Settings for MS2840A
1.
From the Start menu, click Computer.
2.
Right-click the C drive.
3.
Click Share with > Advanced sharing.
4.
Click the Sharing tab.
(4)
(5)
5.
Click Advanced Sharing…
6.
Turn off Share this folder check box to disable currently enabled
folder sharing setting,
(6)
(7)
C-8
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
7.
Click OK
8.
Sharing dialog box appears. Click Yes.
(8)
9.
Turn on Share this folder check box.
10. Click Permissions.
(9)
(10)
11. Turn on Allow check box of Full Control.
(11)
Appendix
Appendix C
12. Click OK to close the dialog(s) displayed.
13. Repeat steps 2 to 12 to the D drive.
C-9
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
C.6 Mounting the equipment drives to the external
computer drives
1.
On the computer connected by way of the network (which is used to
run the anti-virus software), mount (assign) all the shared drives of
the MS2840A as network drives.
2.
On the PC, click Start > Computer.
Right click Network on the Navigation window and click Map
network drive…
(2)
3.
Enter “The IP address of MS2840A + drive name” for the folder
name.
Example
When the IP address of the MS2840A is 192.168.0.1:
To mount the C drive, specify Y for Drive and \\192.168.0.1\c for
Folder.
To mount the D drive, specify Z for Drive and \\192.168.0.1\d for
Folder.
C-10
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
(3)
(4)
(5)
4.
Turn on Connect using different credentials check box.
5.
Click Finish.
6.
Enter ANRITSU for the User name, and also ANRITSU for the
Password (as specified in C.4, Step 7).
(6)
(7)
Click OK > Finish to complete.
8.
Repeat steps 2 to 7 to the D drive.
Appendix
7.
Appendix C
C-11
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
C.7 Scanning for virus
Scan the network drives mounted on the external computer for viruses.
C.8 Unmounting the equipment drives from the
external computer drives
Right click My Network Places on the external PC, and select Disconnect
Network Drive.
Unmount the two mapped drives.
C.9 Making the equipment drives unshared
1.
From Start menu, click Computer.
2.
Right-click the C drive.
3.
Click Share with > Advanced sharing.
4.
Click Sharing tab.
5.
Click Advanced Sharing
6.
Turn off Share this folder check box.
7.
Click OK.
8.
Sharing dialog box appears. Click Yes.
9.
Repeat steps 2 to 8 to the D drive.
C.10 Restoring the previous user account setting for
the equipment
The user password has been changed in Section C.4 "Changing the user
account for the equipment" for mounting the equipment drives to
network drives of the external computer. Restore the password before
change in the same way as it was changed. Note that no password is
specified by default.
C-12
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
C.11 Enabling Simple File Sharing
Simple File Sharing has been disabled in Section C.3 “Configuring
shared settings” for sharing drives. To restore the original settings,
enable Simple File Sharing by using the following procedure:
1.
On MS2840A, click Start > Computer.
2.
In Organize menu, click Folder and search options, and click View tab.
3.
From the Advanced Settings list, Turn on Use Sharing Wizard
(Recommended) check box.
(2)
(3)
(4)
4.
Click OK.
Appendix
Appendix C
C-13
Appendix C Virus Check Procedure
C-14.
Appendix D Error Messages
Table D-1 BER function errors
Message
Out of Range.
This can't be used because it in
Continuous Mode.
This can't be used because PNxFix isn't
selected.
This can't be used because user defined
pattern isn't loaded.
This can't be used because user defined
pattern isn't selected.
No file to read.
Bit pattern is too long.
Bit pattern is too short.
Illegal character exists.
This can't be used because Data is Invalid
status.
This can't be used because MeasureMode is
Invalid status.
This can't be used because CountMode is
Invalid status.
This can't be used because AutoResync is
Invalid status.
This can't be used because UserDefine isn't
selected.
Description
The settable range is exceeded.
This function cannot be used because Continuous
mode is selected for MeasureMode.
This function cannot be used because PN_Fix is
selected for DataType.
This function cannot be used because a user-defined
pattern file is not loaded.
This function cannot be used because a user-defined
pattern file is not selected.
No readable file can be found.
Cannot be read because the user-defined pattern
length is larger than 1024 bits.
Cannot be read because the user-defined pattern
length is smaller than 8 bits.
Cannot be read because the user-defined pattern
contains characters other than “0”, “1”, a line feed, or
a comment marker.
This function cannot be used when Data is invalid.
This function cannot be used when MeasureMode is
invalid.
This function cannot be used when CountMode is
invalid.
This function cannot be used when AutoResync is set
to Off.
This function cannot be used when UserDefine is
selected for Data Type.
Appendix
Appendix D
D-1
Appendix D Error Messages
D-2.
Appendix E Initial Value List
<BER measurement functions>
Data type
Measurement termination condition
Measurement mode
Measurement bit count
Measurement bit error count
Auto Resync
Threshold
at SyncLoss
PN Pattern Initial
PN_Fix_Pattern Length
Start bit of the section for judging
synchronization establishment
Length of the section for judging
synchronization establishment
User-defined pattern loading source
Data polarity
Clock polarity
Enable polarity
PN9
Data
Continuous
1000 bits
1 bit
On
200/500
Count Clear
ALL1
96 bits
1 bit
32 bits
D drive
Positive
Rise
Disable
Appendix
Appendix E
E-1
Appendix E Initial Value List
E-2.
Index
References are to page numbers.
Symbol and Numbers
1st Local Output connector............................. 3-7
Correction (On/Off) ........................................ 3-31
Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol .................. xvi
Cursor keys ...................................................... 3-5
A
D
AC inlet .......................................................... 3-10
Accessory........................................................ 7-10
Alert Mode ..................................................... 3-35
Analysis band calibration ............................. 3-16
Analyze External Mixer Noise Floor............ 3-19
Analyze Noise Floor ...................................... 3-18
Anritsu Warranty ...............................................ix
Appli key .......................................................... 3-6
Application key ................................................ 3-6
Application Switch Settings ................ 3-21, 3-38
Application synchronization ........................... 7-9
Applications Software ................................... 1-10
Associated Documents ........................................ I
Auto Calibration ............................................ 3-14
AUX connector ................................................. 3-9
Averaging ........................................................ 7-11
Digitizer Data ................................................ 3-29
Display Annotation ............................... 3-21, 3-34
Displaying Windows Desktop ......................... 5-3
1
B
Back key ........................................................... 3-3
Band Cal ............................................... 3-15, 3-16
BER Measurement .......................................... 8-2
Board Revision View ..................................... 3-28
Buffer Out connector ....................................... 3-8
C
E-ATT ............................................................. 3-25
Elapsed Time ................................................. 3-35
Electronic attenuator .................................... 3-25
Electrostatic ..................................................... 2-6
Enter key.......................................................... 3-5
Equipment Certificate ....................................... ix
Ethernet connector .......................................... 3-9
external display ............................................... 5-6
Extra Band Cal ..................................... 3-15, 3-17
Extra Band Cal Clear .................................... 3-15
F
File Operation ................................................ 3-21
FPGA Version View ....................................... 3-28
Front Panel ...................................................... 3-2
Function keys................................................... 3-3
G
GPIB connector ................................................ 3-9
I
IF output connector ....................................... 3-11
Information Save .................................. 3-28, 3-56
Initializing ..................................................... 3-55
Installation Location ....................................... 2-2
Installing software ........................................ 3-57
Installing software licenses .......................... 3-59
Interface Settings .......................................... 3-21
L
Level Cal ............................................... 3-15, 3-16
Level calibration ............................................ 3-16
Index-1
Index
Cal key ............................................................. 3-3
Calibration Alert .................................. 3-21, 3-34
Cancel key ........................................................ 3-5
Cautions against computer virus infection ..... xv
CE Conformity Marking ................................ xvii
Close ...................................................... 3-15, 3-21
COM Port ......................................................... 7-4
Configuration ................................................. 3-21
Copy Data ...................................................... 3-29
Copy key........................................................... 3-2
Copy Settings................................................. 3-21
Correction ............................................. 3-21, 3-30
E
Index
level offset ........................................................ 7-8
Lifetime of Parts ............................................... xiv
Load Application Select........................ 3-27, 3-38
Local key .......................................................... 3-3
Local Leak Suppression ....................... 3-15, 3-16
M
M-ATT ............................................................ 3-25
Mechanical attenuator .................................. 3-25
Modulation control key ................................... 3-6
Monitor Out connector .................................. 3-10
N
Next key ........................................................... 3-3
Noise Floor ..................................................... 3-15
Noise Source connector ..................................3-11
Notes On Export Management ........................ xiv
Numeric keypad .............................................. 3-5
O
Open Recall Menu ......................................... 3-54
Open Save Menu ........................................... 3-53
Option Information ....................................... 3-21
Options ............................................................. 1-5
P
Parameter Save Data .................................... 3-29
Position Change.................................... 3-27, 3-43
Power Meter .................................................... 7-2
power sensor .................................................... 7-2
Power Switch ................................................... 3-2
Preset All Application ................................... 3-55
Preset key ........................................................ 3-3
Primary HDD/SSD slot ................................. 3-10
Product Configuration .................................... 1-4
Product Overview ............................................ 1-3
R
range ................................................................ 7-7
RCM Conformity Marking ............................... xix
Rear panel ........................................................ 3-8
Recall all Application .................................... 3-49
Recall Correction Table ........................ 3-31, 3-32
Recall Current Application .................. 3-48, 3-49
Recall key ......................................................... 3-2
Index-2
Ref Input connector ......................................... 3-8
reference frequency signal .............................. 3-8
Reference frequency signal ........................... 3-21
Remote lamp .................................................... 3-3
reverse power ................................................... 2-5
RF Input connector.......................................... 3-5
RF output connector ........................................ 3-6
RF output control key ..................................... 3-6
Rotary knob...................................................... 3-5
S
SA key............................................................... 3-6
SA Trigger Input connector ........................... 3-10
Save Application ................................... 3-46, 3-47
Save Correction Table ................................... 3-31
Save key ........................................................... 3-3
Save Waveform CSV DATA........................... 3-47
Save&Recall Mode ......................................... 3-51
Save&Recall Settings .................................... 3-21
Screen hard copy ........................................... 3-50
Secondary HDD/SSD slot .............................. 3-10
Set Reference ................................................. 7-11
SG key .............................................................. 3-6
SG Trigger Input connector .......................... 3-10
SG Wave License .................................. 3-60, 3-63
SG Wave License View .................................. 3-28
Shift key ........................................................... 3-5
SIGANA All .................................................... 3-15
Signal Analyzer Spectrum analysis ............... 4-2
Simple Recall ................................................. 3-54
Simple Save ................................................... 3-53
Simple Save&Recall ...................................... 3-51
Simple Save&Recall Name ........................... 3-51
Software Install ....... 3-21, 3-30, 3-57, 3-59, 3-60,
................................................... 3-61, 3-62, 3-63
Software License .................................. 3-59, 3-62
Software License View .................................. 3-28
Software Version View .................................. 3-28
SPA key ............................................................ 3-6
Specifications ................................................. 1-11
Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum analysis .......... 4-6
SSD access lamp .............................................. 3-2
Standard configuration ................................... 1-4
Sweep Status Out connector ........................... 3-8
Index
System Information ........... 3-21, 3-28, 3-29, 3-56
System Information View ............................. 3-28
System Recovery ............................................. 5-9
System Reset ........................................ 3-28, 3-56
System Settings ............................................. 3-21
T
Temperature .................................................. 3-35
Title ................................................................ 7-10
Top key ............................................................. 3-3
Trace Data ..................................................... 3-29
Trigger signal................................................. 3-10
U
Uninstall ...................................... 3-61, 3-62, 3-63
Uninstalling ................................................... 3-61
Uninstalling software licenses ..................... 3-62
Unload Application Select.................... 3-27, 3-40
USB connector
Type A ........................................................... 3-6
Type B ........................................................... 3-9
USB connectors
Type A ......................................................... 3-10
user data ............................................... 3-55, 3-56
Z
Zeroing ........................................................... 7-12
Index
Index-3
Index
Index-4.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising